WO2020009085A1 - Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device - Google Patents

Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020009085A1
WO2020009085A1 PCT/JP2019/026209 JP2019026209W WO2020009085A1 WO 2020009085 A1 WO2020009085 A1 WO 2020009085A1 JP 2019026209 W JP2019026209 W JP 2019026209W WO 2020009085 A1 WO2020009085 A1 WO 2020009085A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
actuator
camera
ois
coil
magnet
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/026209
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋平 遠田
Original Assignee
ミツミ電機株式会社
洋平 遠田
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ミツミ電機株式会社, 洋平 遠田 filed Critical ミツミ電機株式会社
Priority to CN201980043631.2A priority Critical patent/CN112334826B/en
Publication of WO2020009085A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020009085A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00—Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02—Bodies
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
    • H02K—DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINES
    • H02K33/00—Motors with reciprocating, oscillating or vibrating magnet, armature or coil system
    • H02K33/02—Motors with reciprocating, oscillating or vibrating magnet, armature or coil system with armatures moved one way by energisation of a single coil system and returned by mechanical force, e.g. by springs
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device.
  • the camera module includes a lens unit having one or more lenses, and an image sensor that captures a subject image formed by the lens unit.
  • a bending optical system that bends light from a subject along the first optical axis in the direction of the second optical axis and guides the light to the subsequent lens unit by a prism that is an optical path bending member provided at the front stage of the lens unit.
  • a camera module including (for example, Patent Document 1).
  • the camera module disclosed in Patent Literature 1 includes a shake correction device that corrects camera shake that occurs in a camera, and an autofocus device that performs autofocus.
  • a camera module has a shake correction actuator and an autofocus actuator as camera actuators.
  • the shake correcting actuator includes a first actuator and a second actuator that swing the prism about two different axes. When a camera shake occurs in the camera, the shake correction actuator swings the prism under the control of the control unit to perform the shake correction. As a result, camera shake caused by the camera is corrected.
  • the movable-side member holding the prism is directly supported by the fixed-side member in a swingable state. For this reason, for example, when an impact is applied to a camera mounting device on which a camera actuator is mounted, the impact may be transmitted from the fixed member to the movable member, and the movable member may be easily damaged. If such damage occurs in the movable member, the accuracy of the above-described shake correction may be reduced.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can reduce an impact transmitted from a fixed member to a movable member.
  • One aspect of the camera actuator according to the present invention includes a fixed member, an optical path bending member that bends incident light along a first direction in a second direction, a movable member that holds the optical path bending member, and a fixed member.
  • a first actuator for swinging the movable member about a swing center axis perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction, and an elastic support for elastically supporting the movable member relative to the fixed member.
  • a first fixing portion fixed to the movable member at a position corresponding to the position of the swing center axis, and fixed at a position separated from each other with the position of the swing center axis therebetween.
  • the vehicle includes a pair of second fixing portions fixed to the side member, and a connecting portion extending from the pair of second fixing portions toward the position of the swing center axis and connecting to the first fixing portion.
  • One embodiment of the camera module according to the present invention includes the above-described camera actuator and an imaging element arranged at a stage subsequent to the lens unit.
  • One embodiment of a camera-mounted device includes the above-described camera module and a control unit that controls the camera module.
  • a camera actuator capable of reducing an impact transmitted from a fixed member to a movable member.
  • FIG. 1A is a front view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1B is a rear view of the camera module according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 1C is a plan view of the camera module according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 1D is a bottom view of the camera module according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 1E is a right side view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1F is a left side view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the camera module according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the prism module of the camera module with some members omitted.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a prism module in which some members are omitted when viewed from a different angle from FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a state where the holder is assembled to the first base.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the first base.
  • FIG. 7 is a plan view of the first base.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing only the swing support spring.
  • FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the prism module.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the holder.
  • FIG. 11 is a bottom view of the holder.
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged side view of a portion P in FIG.
  • FIG. 13A is a perspective view of the lens module.
  • FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the lens module viewed from a different angle from FIG.
  • FIG. 13C is a perspective view of the lens module in which some members are omitted.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a lens module in which some members are omitted when viewed from a different angle from FIG. 13C.
  • FIG. 15 is a side view of the lens module from which the second base is omitted.
  • FIG. 16 is a side view showing the lens module from which the second base is omitted when viewed from the opposite side to FIG.
  • Figure 17 is a lens module that omit some members are A 1 arrow view of FIG. 15.
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the spring taken out in an assembled state.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the FPC, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the FPC, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator.
  • FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the FPC, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator viewed from a different angle from FIG.
  • FIG. 21 is a circuit diagram of the AF drive control circuit.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the second base.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the second base viewed from a different angle from FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the second base.
  • FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the second base, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator.
  • FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the second base, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator, as viewed from a different angle from FIG.
  • FIG. 27 is a plan view of the lens module in which some members are omitted.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the lens guide and the reference member.
  • FIG. 29 is a plan view showing the lens module according to the second embodiment in a state where a part is omitted.
  • FIG. 30 is a circuit diagram of the OIS drive control circuit.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing Modification Example 1 of the lens module.
  • FIG. 32A is a front view illustrating an example of a camera-mounted device equipped with a camera module.
  • FIG. 32B is a rear view illustrating an example of a camera-mounted device equipped with a camera module.
  • FIG. 33A is a front view of an automobile on which the on-vehicle camera module is mounted.
  • FIG. 33B is a perspective view of an automobile equipped with the vehicle-mounted camera module.
  • FIGS. 1A to 28. 1A to 1F are six views showing the appearance (design) of the camera module 1.
  • FIG. 1A to 1F are six views showing the appearance (design) of the camera module 1.
  • the camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device may include all configurations described below or may not include some configurations.
  • the camera module 1 includes, for example, a mobile-side camera mounting device such as a smartphone M (see FIGS. 32A and 32B), a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, and a mobile game machine, and a vehicle-mounted camera. Mounted on camera-mounted devices such as automobiles.
  • each part constituting the camera module 1 of the present embodiment will be described based on the state of being incorporated in the camera module 1.
  • the rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) shown in each drawing is used.
  • the camera module 1 is mounted such that, for example, when an image is actually taken by a camera mounting device, the X direction is the horizontal direction, the Y direction is the vertical direction, and the Z direction is the front and rear direction.
  • Light from the subject enters the prism 23 of the prism module 2 from the + side (plus side) in the Z direction, as indicated by a dashed line ⁇ (also referred to as a first optical axis) in FIG.
  • the light that has entered the prism 23 bends at an optical path bending surface 231 (see FIG. 9) of the prism 23, as shown by a chain line ⁇ (also referred to as a second optical axis) in FIGS.
  • the light is guided to the lens unit 33 (see FIG. 13C) of the lens module 3 disposed downstream of (ie, on the + side in the X direction).
  • the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 is captured by the image sensor module 4 (see FIG. 2) disposed downstream of the lens module 3.
  • the camera module 1 described above is shake-corrected by a first shake correction device 24 (see FIG. 3) incorporated in the prism module 2 and a second shake correction device 35 (see FIG. 15) incorporated in the lens module 3.
  • a first shake correction device 24 see FIG. 3
  • a second shake correction device 35 see FIG. 15
  • the camera module 1 performs autofocus by displacing the lens unit 33 in the X direction by the AF device 34 (see FIG. 15) incorporated in the lens module 3.
  • the prism module 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 12.
  • the prism module 2 includes a first cover 21, a first base 22, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24.
  • the first cover 21 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a non-magnetic metal, and has a box shape opened on both sides in the Z direction and on the + side in the X direction. Light from the subject side can pass through the opening of the first cover 21 in the + Z direction and enter the internal space of the first cover 21.
  • the first cover 21 as described above is combined with a first base 22 described later from the + side in the Z direction.
  • the first base 22 will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the first base 22 has a box shape with an opening on the + side in the Z direction and the + side on the X direction.
  • the first base 22 has a base-side opening 22b in the bottom wall 22a on the negative side in the Z direction.
  • the first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e of the front OIS actuator 27 are arranged in the base-side opening 22b.
  • the first base 22 holds the holder 25 of the first shake correction device 24 via swing support springs 26A and 26B, which will be described later, on a first shaft 29L (also referred to as a swing center axis, which is parallel to the Y direction; see FIG. 6). ) Is supported.
  • the first base 22 has a pair of first side walls 220 and 221 that are separated from each other in the Y direction and face each other.
  • the first base 22 has a connection wall 222 that connects ends of the pair of first side walls 220 and 221 on the ⁇ side in the X direction.
  • the first side walls 220 and 221 each have a first positioning projection 22c and a second positioning projection 22d at both ends in the X direction on the upper surface.
  • the first positioning protrusion 22c and the second positioning protrusion 22d respectively engage with a pair of swing support springs 26A, 26B (see FIG. 8) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 26A, 26B. ing.
  • the first shake correction device 24 will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the first shake correction device 24 is a first actuator, and swings the prism 23 about a first axis 29L (see FIG. 6) parallel to the Y direction to rotate the prism 23 about the first axis 29L. Is performed.
  • Such a first shake correction device 24 is disposed in a first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 9) covered by the first base 22 and the first cover 21.
  • the first shake correction device 24 includes a holder 25, a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B, a front OIS actuator 27, and the like.
  • the holder 25 is supported by the first base 22 via a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B so as to be displaceable (specifically, swingable). In this state, the holder 25 swings about the first shaft 29L based on the driving force of the front OIS actuator 27 (specifically, the thrust in the X direction).
  • the front OIS actuator 27 is driven under the control of the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21)
  • the holder 25 and the prism 23 swing about the first shaft 29L. Thereby, the shake in the rotation direction about the first shaft 29L is corrected.
  • a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24 will be described.
  • the holder 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 and FIGS.
  • the holder 25 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin and holds the prism 23.
  • the holder 25 and the prism 23 are swingably supported by the first base 22 via a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B described later.
  • the holder 25 includes a mounting surface 25a, a pair of opposing walls 25b and 25c, a pair of overhangs 25d and 25e, and a connection wall 25k.
  • the mounting surface 25a faces the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 from the back side (negative side in the Z direction).
  • the mounting surface 25a has, for example, a surface parallel to the optical path bending surface 231.
  • the mounting surface 25a is not limited to the structure of the present embodiment, and may be, for example, a boss capable of positioning the prism 23.
  • the pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c are plate members parallel to the XZ plane, and are arranged separated from each other in the Y direction. Such a pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c are arranged so as to sandwich the mounting surface 25a from the Y direction.
  • a pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e are provided on a pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c, respectively. Such a pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e respectively support the holder 25 so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22.
  • one (that is, the + side in the Y direction) protrusion 25d is provided on the + side in the Y direction of the opposing wall 25b, and projects from the side in the + side in the Y direction.
  • One (ie, the Y-direction) overhang portion 25e is provided on the Y-direction-side surface of the opposing wall 25c, and projects from the side surface in the Y-direction side. Further, the pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e respectively have flat spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g (see FIG. 11) on the back surface (that is, the surface on the minus side in the Z direction). Each of the spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g has a pair of holder-side positioning projections 25h and 25i (see FIG. 11) protruding in the negative direction in the Z direction at two locations separated in the X direction.
  • the surfaces of the first fixing portions 262 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B on the + Z direction side are adhesively fixed to the spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g, respectively.
  • the pair of holder-side positioning projections 25h and 25i are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c of the swing support springs 26A and 26B, respectively.
  • the holder 25 is swingably supported with respect to the first base 22.
  • connection wall 25k connects the ends of the pair of opposing walls 25b and 25c on the negative side in the X direction in the Y direction.
  • the holder 25 has a magnet holding portion 25j (see FIG. 9) for holding a first magnet 27a described later on the back surface.
  • ⁇ Swinging support spring> With reference to FIG. 8, a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (also referred to as elastic support members) will be described. Each of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B elastically supports a holder 25 to be described later with respect to the first base 22. The pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B respectively support the holder 25 so as to be swingable about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6) with respect to the first base 22.
  • the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B are metal leaf springs, respectively, and have an upper surface of the first side wall portions 220 and 221 of the first base 22 and a lower surface of the pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e of the holder 25. It is located between.
  • the swing support spring 26A of one of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (that is, the Y direction + side) will be described.
  • the other swing support spring 26B (that is, the minus side in the Y direction) is symmetric in the Y direction with one swing support spring 26A. For this reason, among the configurations of the swing support spring 26B, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the swing support spring 26A.
  • the swing support spring 26A has a first fixing portion 262, a pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261, a pair of connecting portions 263 and 264, and the like.
  • One of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 (that is, the + side in the X direction) is disposed at the end of the swing support spring 26A on the + side in the X direction.
  • One such second fixing portion 260 has a first through hole 26a.
  • the second fixing portion 261 on the other side (that is, on the negative side in the X direction) is arranged at the end on the negative side in the X direction of the swing support spring 26A.
  • the other second fixing portion 261 has a first through hole 26b.
  • the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 are connected to the first fixing portion 262 by a pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 extending in the X direction, respectively.
  • the surfaces of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 on the negative side in the Z direction are adhesively fixed to the end surfaces of the first side wall 220 of the first base 22 on the positive side in the Z direction.
  • the first positioning protrusions 22c of the first side wall 220 are inserted into the first through holes 26a and 26b, respectively (see FIGS. 6 and 8).
  • the surfaces of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 on the negative side in the Z direction are bonded and fixed to the end surfaces of the first side wall 221 of the first base 22 on the positive side in the Z direction. I have.
  • the second positioning projection 22d of the first side wall 221 is inserted into each of the first through holes 26a and 26b (see FIGS. 6 and 8).
  • the first fixing portion 262 is provided at a portion between the second fixing portions 260 and 261 in the X direction via a gap in the X direction.
  • the first fixing portion 262 has a pair of second through holes 26c.
  • the surface of the first fixing portion 262 on the + side in the Z direction is adhesively fixed to a spring seat surface 25f formed on the back surface of the extension 25d of the holder 25.
  • the surface of the first fixing portion 262 of the swing support spring 26B on the + side in the Z direction is adhesively fixed to a spring seat surface 25g formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25e of the holder 25.
  • a pair of holder-side positioning projections 25h formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25d of the holder 25 are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c, respectively.
  • a pair of holder-side positioning projections 25i formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25e of the holder 25 are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c, respectively.
  • the connecting part 263 of the pair of connecting parts 263 and 264 connects the second fixing part 260 and the first fixing part 262.
  • the connecting portion 264 of the pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 connects the second fixing portion 261 and the first fixing portion 262.
  • Each of the pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 has a substantially S-shaped linear shape.
  • the pair of connecting portions 263, 264 are respectively straight portions 26d, 26e parallel to the Y direction (that is, parallel to the first shaft 29L) at ends (also referred to as one ends) on the side closer to the first fixing portion 262. Having.
  • the straight portion 26d of the connection portion 263 and the straight portion 26e of the connection portion 264 constitute a torsion allowable portion 265.
  • the torsion allowable portion 265 allows the first fixing portion 262 to twist with respect to the second fixing portions 260 and 261 by being twisted. That is, the holder 25 swings with respect to the first base 22 by twisting of the torsion allowance portion 265.
  • the first shaft 29L which is the center of the swing of the holder 25, is constituted by the torsion allowable portion 265 of the swing support springs 26A, 26B. Therefore, the holder 25 does not need to include the swing center axis as a configuration. Thus, in the case of the present embodiment, the holder 25 is simply configured.
  • the torsion allowable portion 265 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the second fixing portions 260 and 261 and the first fixing portion 262 by being elastically deformed. That is, the torsion allowable portion 265 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first base 22 and the holder 25 by elastically deforming. With such a configuration, the impact transmitted from the first base 22 to the holder 25 is reduced.
  • the torsion allowable portion 265 may be provided with a gel-like vibration damping member.
  • the vibration damping member may be provided so as to cover the twist allowable portion 265. Further, the vibration damping member may be in contact with the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22. Further, the vibration damping member may be in contact with the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22 and the lower surfaces of the pair of overhangs 25 d and 25 e of the holder 25.
  • the vibration damping member is effective in suppressing resonance of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. From the viewpoint of suppressing the resonance, it is preferable that the vibration damping member is provided in the torsion permissible portion 265 that deforms most when used in the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. However, the vibration damping member may be provided at a portion other than the torsion allowable portion 265 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B.
  • the holder 25 and the first base 22 are not in direct contact. That is, in the assembled state, the holder 25 and the first base 22 are connected only via the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. In other words, the holder 25 and the first base 22 are apart from each other except for the connection between the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B.
  • the damping member is in contact with the first base 22 and the holder 25, the first base 22 and the holder 25 are connected only to the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B and the damping member. Connected through.
  • the peripheral surface of the first base 22 does not contact the peripheral surface of the holder 25 facing the peripheral surface in a predetermined direction.
  • the holder 25 is supported (floating supported) so as to float on the first base 22 by the pair of swinging support springs 26A and 26B.
  • the entire surface is located between the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 22 a of the first base 22 and the back surface of the holder 25 facing the low wall portion 22 a in the Z direction. There is a predetermined gap in the Z direction.
  • the inner side surface (the Y-side surface) of the first side wall 220 of the first base 22 and the outer side surface (the Y-direction side surface) of the opposing wall portion 25b of the holder 25 facing the inner side surface There is a predetermined gap in the Y direction over the entire surface.
  • the inner side surface of the first side wall portion 221 of the first base 22 (the + side surface in the Y direction) and the outer side surface of the opposing wall portion 25 c of the holder 25 facing the inner side surface (the ⁇ side surface in the Y direction)
  • connection wall portion 222 of the first base 22 (the + side surface in the X direction) and the outer surface of the connection wall portion 25 k of the holder 25 facing the inner surface (the ⁇ side surface in the X direction).
  • the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22 (the surface on the + side in the Z direction) and the lower surfaces of the pair of protrusions 25d and 25e of the holder 25 facing the upper surface in the Z direction ( ⁇ Z direction). (A side surface), there is a gap in the Z direction over the entire surface.
  • the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B alleviate the impact applied to the holder 25 and the prism 23 from the first base 22. This suppresses damage to the holder 25 when the camera mounting device falls.
  • the front OIS actuator 27 (also referred to as a first actuator) will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the front OIS actuator 27 swings the holder 25 about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6).
  • the first axis 29L is an axis parallel to the Y direction.
  • the first shaft 29L is a straight line connecting the center positions in the X direction of the first fixing portions 262 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B.
  • the front OIS actuator 27 is disposed on the back side (that is, the negative side in the Z direction) of the prism 23 and the holder 25 so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 and the holder 25 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). Have been.
  • the front OIS actuator 27 includes a first magnet 27a, a first coil 27c, a first Hall element 27e, and the like.
  • the first magnet 27a is fixed to the rear side surface (that is, the surface on the negative side in the Z direction) of the holder 25, which is a movable member. Specifically, the first magnet 27a is fixed to a magnet holding portion 25j provided on the back surface of the holder 25.
  • the first magnet 27a is composed of two magnet elements adjacent in the X direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction, and has one magnetic pole on one side. The directions of the magnetic poles of each magnet element are opposite to each other.
  • the first magnet 27a may include two magnet elements integrally formed.
  • the first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter, referred to as FPC) 28 fixed to the back surface of the first base 22 (that is, the surface on the + side in the Z direction). I have.
  • FPC flexible printed circuit board
  • the first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e are arranged in the base-side opening 22b of the first base 22.
  • the first coil 27c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape. Note that the first coil 27c may be a so-called pattern coil printed on the surface of the FPC 28.
  • the first Hall element 27e is arranged inside the first coil 27c in the radial direction.
  • the front OIS actuator 27 having the above configuration swings the holder 25 about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6) under the control of the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21).
  • lens module 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIGS. 13A to 28.
  • the lens module 3 includes a second cover 31, a second base 32, a lens unit 33, an AF device 34, and a second shake correction device 35.
  • the lens module 3 shown in FIGS. 13A to 28 differs from, for example, the lens module 3 shown in FIG. 2 in the direction in which the terminals (such as a first terminal portion 34d1 described later) of the FPC project from the second base 32.
  • the structure of the other parts in the lens module 3 shown in FIGS. 13A to 28 is substantially the same as that of the lens module 3 shown in FIG.
  • the second cover 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 13A and 13B.
  • the second cover 31 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a non-magnetic metal, and has a box shape that is open on both sides in the X direction and on the ⁇ side (that is, the back side) in the Z direction.
  • the second cover 31 has a top plate portion 31a, a front plate portion 31b, a rear plate portion 31c, a first side plate portion 31d, and a second side plate portion 31e.
  • the top plate portion 31a is a rectangular plate member. Such a top plate portion 31a is disposed on the + side in the Z direction of the second cover 31.
  • the top plate portion 31a has a notch 31f at one end in the X direction (an end on the prism module 2 (see FIG. 2) side and an end on the negative side in the X direction).
  • the notch 31f is cut out from the minus end in the X direction of the top plate portion 31a toward the plus side in the X direction.
  • Such a notch 31f has a rectangular shape long in the Y direction in plan view.
  • a connection member 343d described later is arranged in such a notch 31f.
  • the front plate portion 31b is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the X-direction end of the top plate portion 31a to the Z-direction side.
  • the front plate portion 31b has a front opening portion 31g in a portion including the central portion.
  • the front opening 31g has a size such that the end surface on the ⁇ X direction side of the lens unit 33 can be exposed on the ⁇ X direction side.
  • Light from the prism module 2 passes through the front opening 31g and enters the lens unit 33.
  • the front opening 31g is continuous with the notch 31f of the top plate 31a. Therefore, the edge of the front opening 31g on the + side in the Z direction does not exist in the corner 31h formed by the top plate 31a and the front plate 31b. Such a configuration can facilitate the processing of the front opening 31g.
  • the rear plate portion 31c is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the end of the top plate portion 31a on the plus side in the X direction to the minus side in the Z direction.
  • the rear plate portion 31c has a rear opening 31i in a portion including the central portion.
  • the rear opening 31i has a size such that the end surface of the lens unit 33 on the + side in the X direction can be exposed on the + side in the X direction.
  • the light from the lens unit 33 passes through the rear opening 31i and enters the image sensor module 4.
  • the first side plate portion 31d is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the end of the top plate portion 31a on the plus side in the Y direction to the minus side in the Z direction.
  • the second side plate portion 31e is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the Y-direction end of the top plate portion 31a to the Z-direction side.
  • the second cover 31 as described above is combined with a second base 32 described later from the + side in the Z direction.
  • the second base 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C, 14, and 22 to 26.
  • the second base 32 is combined with the above-described second cover 31 to form a second accommodation space 32c (see FIG. 2) in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 34, and the second shake correction device 35 can be arranged. .
  • the second base 32 is configured by combining a lower base element 32a and an upper base element 32b.
  • the second base 32 has a bottom surface portion 32d and a pair of second side wall portions 32g, 32h.
  • the bottom surface 32d has a base made of a synthetic resin, and a metal reinforcing plate 32k insert-molded on the base. Such a reinforcing plate 32k contributes to increasing the rigidity and reducing the thickness of the bottom surface portion 32d.
  • the reinforcing plate 32k of the second base 32 is disposed on the minus side in the Z direction from a lens guide 341 described later so as to overlap the lens guide 341.
  • the range in which the lens guide 341 can move during the autofocus operation that is, the range in which the lens guide 341 can move in the X direction
  • the range in which the lens guide 341 can move during the shake correction operation that is, the range that can move in the Y direction
  • the lens guide 341 exists on the + side in the Z direction of the reinforcing plate 32k. Therefore, the surface of the reinforcing plate 32k (that is, the surface on the + side in the Z direction) is always covered with the lens guide 341 and is not exposed. Thus, the light reflected by the reinforcing plate 32k is prevented from entering the lens unit 33 and eventually the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 described later.
  • the second base 32 has bottom through holes 32e and 32f (see FIGS. 22 and 23) on both sides in the Y direction of the reinforcing plate 32k on the bottom surface 32d. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a first AF coil 346b and a second AF coil 347b of an AF actuator 345 described later are arranged in the bottom through holes 32e and 32f, respectively.
  • the second side walls 32g and 32h extend from both ends in the Y direction of the bottom surface 32d to the + side in the Z direction.
  • the second side wall 32g is formed by combining the second lower wall element 32a1 of the lower base element 32a and the second upper wall element 32b1 of the upper base element 32b. It is configured.
  • the second side wall portion 32h is configured by combining a second lower wall element 32a2 of the lower base element 32a and a second upper wall element 32b2 of the upper base element 32b.
  • the second side wall portions 32g and 32h have coil mounting portions 32i and 32j, respectively.
  • a first OIS coil 352b and a second OIS coil 353b of a second shake correction device 35 described later are mounted on such coil mounting portions 32i and 32j, respectively.
  • the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j are provided on the upper surfaces of the second upper wall elements 32b1, 32b2 of the upper base element 32b.
  • the coil mounting portion 32i is disposed between the first overhang portion 34a1 and the second overhang portion 34a3 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction.
  • the coil mounting portion 32j is disposed between the first overhang portion 34a2 and the second overhang portion 34a4 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction.
  • a first AF magnet 346a of an AF actuator 345 described below is disposed between the coil mounting portion 32i and the bottom surface 32d. Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a second AF magnet 347a of the AF actuator 345 is disposed between the coil mounting portion 32j and the bottom surface portion 32d. The first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are held by a lens guide 341 described later.
  • the bottom surface through holes 32e and 32f and the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j overlap with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Therefore, the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b disposed in the bottom through holes 32e and 32f, and the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b mounted on the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j. Overlap at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • the second side wall portion 32g has spring arranging portions 32m1 and 32m3 (see FIG. 13C) for arranging springs 342a1 and 342a3 to be described later at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the + Y side.
  • the second side wall portion 32h has spring disposing portions 32m2 and 32m4 (see FIG. 14) for disposing springs 342a2 and 342a4 described later on both ends in the X direction on the negative side surface in the Y direction.
  • the second base 32 has a reference portion 32n at the end in the X direction + side.
  • the reference portion 32n is a plate member provided at an end of the second base 32 on the + side in the X direction.
  • Such a side surface of the reference portion 32n on the + side in the X direction is a reference surface in the X direction of the image sensor module 4 described later.
  • the reference portion 32n has a first reference surface 32n1 (see FIG. 23), which is a reference surface in the X direction of a lens guide 341 to be described later, on the negative side surface in the X direction.
  • Such a first reference plane 32n1 is also a reference for the later-described calibration.
  • the reference portion 32n has a through hole at the center thereof for guiding the light passing through the lens portion 33 to the image sensor module 4.
  • Such a reference portion 32n is a member for positioning the image sensor module 4.
  • the lens portion 33 is disposed in the second housing space 32c (see FIG. 2) while being held by a lens guide 341 described later.
  • a lens unit 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held by the lens barrel.
  • the lens unit 33 has a telephoto lens group, for example, three times or more optically fixed between an end on the negative side in the X direction of the lens barrel and an end on the positive side in the X direction of the lens barrel. Note that the structure of the lens unit 33 is not limited to the above-described structure.
  • the AF device 34 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C to 21.
  • the AF device 34 is a driving unit, and displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus.
  • the AF device 34 includes a lens guide 341, a first support mechanism 342, a second support mechanism 343, an FPC 344, and an AF actuator 345.
  • FIG. 15 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where some members are omitted, as viewed from the + side in the Y direction.
  • FIG. 16 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where some members are omitted, as viewed from the ⁇ side in the Y direction.
  • FIG. 17 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where the second base 32 is omitted, as viewed from the negative side in the X direction.
  • the lens guide 341 has a cylindrical lens holding portion 341a, a pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2, and a pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4. Such a lens guide 341 is arranged in the second accommodation space 32c in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
  • the lens holding portion 341a has a housing space that can hold the lens barrel.
  • a pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2 are provided so as to extend from two locations on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lens holding portion 341a in directions opposite to each other in the Y direction.
  • the pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 are respectively provided in the Y direction from two locations on the + Z direction side of the pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2 on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lens holding portion 341a. They are provided so as to extend in opposite directions.
  • One (Y direction + side) of the first overhang 34a1 and one (Y direction + side) of the second overhang 34a3 overlap in the Z direction via a space 34b1.
  • the other (Y-direction side) first overhang portion 34a2 and the other (Y-direction side) second overhang portion 34a4 overlap with each other via the space 34b2 in the Z direction.
  • the lens guide 341 includes a first magnet holding portion 34a5 (see FIG. 15) for holding a first AF magnet 346a of an AF actuator 345 described later, and a first magnet holding portion 34a6 (FIG. 16) for holding a second AF magnet 347a. Reference). Specifically, the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are provided on the pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2, respectively.
  • the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are concave portions opened on the negative side in the Z direction. Such first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are respectively arranged on the negative side in the Z direction of the pair of coil mounting portions 32i and 32j of the second base 32 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 and the bottom through holes 32e, 32f of the second base 32 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction.
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are provided on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the bottom surface through holes 32e and 32f.
  • the lens guide 341 has a second magnet holding portion 34a7 (see FIG. 15) for holding a first OIS magnet 352a of a rear OIS actuator 351 described later.
  • the lens guide 341 has a second magnet holding portion 34a8 (see FIG. 16) for holding the second OIS magnet 353a of the rear OIS actuator 351.
  • the second magnet holding portions 34a7 and 34a8 are provided on the pair of second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4, respectively.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7 and 34a8 are concave portions opened on the negative side in the Z direction.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7, 34a8 and the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j of the second base 32 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7, 34a8 are provided on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j.
  • the lens guide 341 has a third magnet holder 34b3 (see FIG. 15) near the first magnet holder 34a5 for holding the first X position detection magnet 346d of the AF actuator 345.
  • the lens guide 341 has a third magnet holder 34b4 (see FIG. 16) that holds the second X position detection magnet 347d of the AF actuator 345 near the first magnet holder 34a6.
  • the third magnet holding portions 34b3, 34b4 are respectively provided on the ⁇ X direction side of the first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 of the pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2. Note that the positions of the third magnet holding units 34b3 and 34b4 are not limited to the above positions as long as they are near the first magnet holding units 34a5 and 34a6.
  • the lens guide 341 includes a pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) that hold the Y position detection magnets 352c and 353c of the rear OIS actuator 351 near the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6. ).
  • the pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 are respectively provided on the X direction + side of the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 among the pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2. .
  • the positions of the pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 are not limited to the above-described positions as long as they are near the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6.
  • the lens guide 341 has a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) ball holding portions 343a (see FIG. 14) for holding a plurality of balls 343e of a second support mechanism 343 described later. Specifically, three of these ball holding portions 343a are provided on the surface of the pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 on the + side in the Z direction.
  • the end surface of the lens guide 341 in the + X direction (hereinafter, referred to as “lens guide-side reference surface”) is the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n. Abut.
  • the lens guide-side reference surface of the lens guide 341 and the first reference surface 32n1 are flat surfaces parallel to the YZ plane. Therefore, in a state in which the lens guide-side reference surface of the lens guide 341 and the first reference surface 32n1 are in contact with each other (surface contact), the lens guide 341 moves Y in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis).
  • the lens guide 341 is not inclined in the direction and the Z direction (hereinafter, referred to as “the reference state of the lens guide 341”).
  • the first support mechanism 342 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C to 16 and FIG.
  • the first support mechanism 342 elastically supports the lens guide 341 on the second base 32 so as to be displaceable with respect to the second base 32.
  • Such a first support mechanism 342 is also called an elastic support mechanism.
  • the first support mechanism 342 has a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) springs 342a1 to 342a4, each of which is an elastic support member.
  • the springs 342a1 to 342a4 elastically support the lens guide 341 on the second base 32.
  • the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32.
  • the displacement of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is restricted to a predetermined range by the first support mechanism 342.
  • the predetermined range is a range in which the lens guide 341 can be displaced based on the elastic deformation of the springs 342a1 to 342a4.
  • the spring 342a1 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the + side in the X direction and on the + side in the Y direction on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13C).
  • the spring 342a2 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the X direction + side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 14).
  • the spring 342a3 supports an end of the lens guide 341 on the negative side in the X direction and on the positive side in the Y direction on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13C).
  • the spring 342a4 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the X direction-side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 14).
  • each of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 has a first fixing portion 342b, a second fixing portion 342c, and a connection portion 342d.
  • FIG. 18 shows the springs 342a1 to 342a4 as they are arranged in the assembled state.
  • the first fixing portion 342b is fixed to a lens guide 341 which is a movable member.
  • the second fixing portion 342c is fixed to the second base 32, which is a fixed member.
  • the connecting portion 342d connects the first fixing portion 342b and the second fixing portion 342c.
  • the connection portion 342d is made of, for example, a linear member that is at least partially curved (specifically, bent in a meandering shape).
  • each of the connection portions 342d includes a first bent portion 342e and a second bent portion 342f in order from the + side in the Z direction.
  • Such springs 342a1 to 342a4 are arranged on the spring arrangement portions 32m1 to 32m4 (see FIGS. 13C and 14) of the second base 32, respectively.
  • the first bent portion 342e is a portion bent in a meandering shape, and is provided at one end (the end in the + Z direction) of the connecting portion 342d.
  • the first bent portion 342e is elastically deformed in the length direction (Z direction) of the connection portion 342d.
  • the position of the first bent portion 342e is not limited to the position of the present embodiment.
  • the first bent portion 342e is preferably provided in a half portion on one side of the connection portion 342d (that is, a half portion on the first fixed portion 342b side). Further, it is more preferable that the first bent portion 342e is provided at one end of the connection portion 342d as in the present embodiment.
  • each of the first bent portions 342e may be covered with a gel-like vibration damping member.
  • the second bent portion 342f is a linear member that is provided at the other end (the end on the negative side in the Z direction) of the connecting portion 342d and is bent in a meandering shape.
  • the second bent part 342f is elastically deformed in the length direction (Z direction) of the connection part 342d.
  • the displacement of the second bent portion 342f when the lens portion 33 is displaced in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is smaller than the displacement of the first bent portion 342e.
  • connection portion 342d When the lens portion 33 is displaced in the X direction with respect to the second base 32, the connection portion 342d is displaced so as to swing around the end near the second fixed portion 342c. Accordingly, the farther from the fulcrum (in other words, the closer to the first fixing portion 342b) the connecting portion 342d, the larger the displacement amount when the lens portion 33 is displaced in the X direction with respect to the second base 32.
  • the position of the second bent portion 342f is not limited to the position of the present embodiment.
  • the second bent portion 342f is preferably provided in a half portion on the other side of the connection portion 342d (that is, a half portion on the second fixed portion 342c side). Further, it is more preferable that the second bent portion 342f is provided at the other end of the connection portion 342d as in the present embodiment.
  • the second bent portion 342f may be omitted. That is, the connecting portion 342d may have a configuration having a bent portion only at one place.
  • each of the second bent portions 342f may be covered with a gel-like vibration damping member.
  • connection portion 342d has directionality in the X direction.
  • the spring 342a1 and the spring 342a2 are arranged so as to be in the same direction in the X direction.
  • the spring 342a1 and the spring 342a2 are arranged such that at least the connection portions 342d overlap when viewed from the + side in the Y direction, for example.
  • the spring 342a3 and the spring 342a4 are arranged so as to be in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 342a3 and the spring 342a4 are arranged such that at least the connection portion 342d overlaps when viewed from the + side in the Y direction, for example.
  • the spring 342a1 and the spring 342a3 are arranged such that the connection portion 342d faces in the same direction in the X direction.
  • the spring 342a2 and the spring 342a4 are arranged so that the connecting portion 342d faces in the same direction in the X direction.
  • the center of gravity G of the movable side member at the reference position matches or substantially matches with the center of gravity G.
  • the movable member refers to the lens guide 341 and each member fixed to the lens guide 341 and displaceable together with the lens guide 341.
  • the movable side members include the lens guide 341, the lens unit 33, the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a of the AF actuator 345, and the first OIS of the rear OIS actuator 351. It is configured to include a magnet 352a, a second OIS magnet 353a, and the like.
  • the center of each of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 is, for example, the center position in the Z direction and the center position in the X direction of each spring 342a1 to 342a4.
  • the reference position of the lens guide 341 refers to a state where the lens guide 341 is not displaced in the X direction by the autofocus function and a state where the lens guide 341 is not displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 35 described later.
  • the springs 342a1 to 342a4 as described above are arranged as follows.
  • a straight line passing through the center of gravity G and parallel to the direction of the second optical axis that is, the X direction
  • L 4 straight line
  • the pair of springs 342a1 and 342a2 on the + side in the X direction are and symmetrically with respect to L 4, they are arranged in two distant positions spaced by a predetermined distance in the X-direction positive side from the center of gravity G (right side in FIG. 18).
  • X-direction - a pair of springs side 342a3,342a4 is symmetrical with respect to the straight line L 4, and, from the center of gravity G X direction - is disposed on the side above a predetermined distance apart two positions (the left side in FIG. 18) You.
  • the intersection between the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 coincides with the center of gravity G.
  • the second support mechanism 343 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13A to 17.
  • the second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 on the second base 32 such that the lens guide 341 can be displaced in the XY plane with respect to the second base 32.
  • the second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 in a state where displacement in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is restricted.
  • the second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 in a state in which the lens guide 341 cannot be displaced in the + Z direction with respect to the second base 32.
  • the second support mechanism 343 has a plurality of ball holding portions 343a, a pair of track members 343b1, 343b2, a connection member 343d, and a plurality of balls 343e.
  • the plurality of ball holding portions 343a are provided on the surfaces of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4 of the lens guide 341 on the + side in the Z direction.
  • three ball holding portions 343a are provided on each of the surfaces on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4.
  • the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are plate members parallel to the XY plane, for example.
  • Each of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 is made of a magnetic metal such as an iron-based alloy.
  • the track member 343b1 and the first OIS magnet 352a arranged on the + side in the Y direction are arranged on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction. Further, the track member 343b1 is disposed on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the first OIS magnet 352a.
  • the track member 343b2 and the second OIS magnet 353a arranged on the negative side in the Y direction are arranged on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction.
  • the track member 343b2 is disposed on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the second OIS magnet 353a.
  • the first OIS magnet 352a is attracted in the direction approaching the track member 343b1 (that is, in the Z direction + side) based on its own magnetic force.
  • the second OIS magnet 353a is attracted in the direction approaching the track member 343b2 (that is, in the + Z direction) based on its magnetic force.
  • Such a force acting between the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a and the track members 343b1 and 343b2 is, for example, when the springs 342a1 to 342a4 are omitted (that is, in the embodiment described later). 2), it is possible to float the movable member described above from the fixed member (second base 32).
  • the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4 of the lens guide 341 and the + Z direction surface of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4, respectively. It is provided in the state facing.
  • Each of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 has a flat track surface 343c (see FIGS. 15 and 16) on the negative surface in the Z direction.
  • the raceway surface 343c is opposed to the surface on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 in the Z direction.
  • connection member 343d The ends on the negative side in the X direction of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are connected by a connection member 343d.
  • the connection member 343d is arranged in the notch 31f of the top plate 31a in the second cover 31 (see FIGS. 13A and 13C). In this state, the connection member 343d covers the entire cutout 31f. Accordingly, the connection member 343d prevents light from entering the lens unit 33 from the cutout 31f.
  • the connection member 343d is fixed to the second cover 31. Since the second cover 31 is fixed to the second base 32, the connection member 343 d and the pair of track members 343 b 1 and 343 b 2 are fixed to the second base 32 via the second cover 31.
  • the plurality of balls 343e are respectively held by the plurality of ball holding units 343a. In this state, the plurality of balls 343e are rotatably disposed between the inner surfaces of the plurality of ball holding portions 343a and the track surfaces 343c of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2. . The plurality of balls 343e are in contact with the inner surfaces of the plurality of ball holding portions 343a and the raceway surfaces 343c of the pair of raceway members 343b1, respectively.
  • the FPC 344 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21, FIG. 25, and FIG.
  • the FPC 344 is a flexible printed circuit board, and is fixed to the second base 32 (see FIGS. 13C and 14).
  • the FPC 344 includes an FPC base portion 344a, a first terminal portion 34d1, a second terminal portion 34d2, a third terminal portion 34d3, a first coil fixing portion 34d4, a second coil fixing portion 34d5, a first controller fixing portion 34d6, and a second controller. It has a fixing section 34d7, a hall element fixing section 34d8, and an AF drive control circuit 344b (see FIG. 21).
  • the FPC base 344a is a plate member parallel to the XY plane, and is fixed to the second base 32 (see FIGS. 13C and 14).
  • the first terminal portion 34d1 and the second terminal portion 34d2 respectively extend in the Z direction + side from two places separated in the Y direction at the X direction + side end of the FPC base 344a.
  • the first terminal 34d1 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b.
  • the second terminal 34d2 is electrically connected to the second OIS coil 353b.
  • the third terminal portion 34d3 is connected to the sensor substrate 6 (FIG. 21) on which the image sensor module 4 is mounted. As shown in FIG. 21, the third terminal unit 34d3 has a power terminal T1, a ground terminal T2, a data signal terminal T3, a first clock terminal T4, and a second clock terminal T5. In a state where the FPC 344 is connected to the sensor board 6, each terminal of the third terminal portion 34d3 is connected to each corresponding terminal in the board-side circuit 6a of the sensor board 6.
  • the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are respectively provided at positions facing the first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction on the + Z direction surface of the FPC base 344a. ing. Specifically, the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are connected to one side (Y direction + side) of the FPC base 344a in the Y direction centering on the second optical axis on the surface in the Z direction + side. ) And the other side in the Y direction ( ⁇ side in the Y direction).
  • a first AF coil 346b and a second AF coil 347b are fixed to the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5, respectively.
  • the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are respectively disposed in bottom through holes 32e and 32f of the second base 32 (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the first controller fixing part 34d6 and the second controller fixing part 34d7 are provided near the first coil fixing part 34d4 and the second coil fixing part 34d5, respectively, on the surface of the FPC base 344a on the + side in the Z direction. Specifically, the first controller fixing portion 34d6 and the second controller fixing portion 34d7 are respectively more in the X direction than the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 on the + Z direction surface of the FPC base 344a. It is provided near the negative side.
  • a first AF controller 346c and a second AF controller 347c are fixed to the first controller fixing unit 34d6 and the second controller fixing unit 34d7, respectively.
  • the Hall element fixing portion 34d8 is provided at a position facing the fourth magnet holding portion 34b6 (see FIG. 16) of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction on the surface of the FPC base 344a on the + side in the Z direction.
  • An OIS Hall element 353d of a rear OIS actuator 351 described later is fixed to the Hall element fixing portion 34d8.
  • the AF drive control circuit 344b includes a first power line L1, a second power line L2, a first ground line L3, a second ground line L4, a first data signal line L5, and a second data signal. It has a line L6, a first clock line L7, a second clock line L8, first coil power supply lines L9, L10, and second coil power supply lines L11, L12.
  • the first power supply line L1 is a transmission line for a current supplied from the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6 to the first AF controller 346c.
  • One end of the first power supply line L1 is connected to the power supply terminal T1 of the third terminal portion 34d3.
  • the other end of the first power supply line L1 is connected to an input-side power supply terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the second power supply line L2 is a transmission line for a current supplied from the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6 to the second AF controller 347c.
  • One end of the second power supply line L2 is connected to the power supply terminal T1 of the third terminal portion 34d3.
  • the other end of the second power line L2 is connected to a power input terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the first power supply line L1 and the second power supply line L2 are branched on the way.
  • the first ground line L3 is a transmission line for ground. One end of the first ground line L3 is connected to the ground terminal T2 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the first ground line L3 is connected to a ground terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the second ground line L4 is a transmission line for ground. One end of the second ground line L4 is connected to the ground terminal T2 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the second ground line L4 is connected to a ground terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the first ground line L3 and the second ground line L4 are branched on the way.
  • the first data signal line L5 is a transmission line for a control signal between the control unit 5 and the first AF controller 346c. One end of the first data signal line L5 is connected to the data signal terminal T3 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the first data signal line L5 is connected to an input data signal terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the second data signal line L6 is a control signal transmission line between the control unit 5 and the second AF controller 347c. One end of the second data signal line L6 is connected to the data signal terminal T3 of the third terminal part 34d3. The other end of the second data signal line L6 is connected to an input-side data signal terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the first data signal line L5 and the second data signal line L6 are branched on the way.
  • the first clock line L7 is a transmission line of a clock signal between the control unit 5 and the first AF controller 346c. One end of the first clock line L7 is connected to the first clock terminal T4 of the third terminal 34d3. The other end of the first clock line L7 is connected to a clock terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the second clock line L8 is a transmission line of a clock signal between the control unit 5 and the second AF controller 347c. One end of the second clock line L8 is connected to the second clock terminal T5 of the third terminal 34d3. The other end of the second clock line L8 is connected to a clock terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the first coil power supply lines L9 and L10 are transmission lines that connect the first AF controller 346c and the first AF coil 346b.
  • One end of the first coil power supply line L9 is connected to a first terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the other end of the first coil power supply line L9 is connected to one end of the first AF coil 346b.
  • One end of the first coil power supply line L10 is connected to a second terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the other end of the first coil power supply line L10 is connected to the other end of the first AF coil 346b.
  • the second coil power supply lines L11 and L12 are transmission lines that connect the second AF controller 347c and the second AF coil 347b.
  • One end of the second coil power supply line L11 is connected to a first terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the other end of the second coil power supply line L11 is connected to one end of the second AF coil 347b.
  • One end of the second coil power supply line L12 is connected to a second terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the other end of the second coil power supply line L12 is connected to the other end of the second AF coil 347b.
  • the AF drive control circuit 344b as described above is connected to the sensor substrate 6 via the third terminal 34d3.
  • the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c are connected to the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
  • the AF actuator 345 will be described with reference to FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG.
  • the AF actuator 345 (also referred to as a third actuator) is a driving mechanism that displaces the lens guide 341 in the X direction (direction of the second optical axis) during autofocus.
  • the AF actuator 345 has a first AF actuator 346 disposed on the + side in the Y direction and a second AF actuator 347 disposed on the ⁇ side in the Y direction.
  • the first AF actuator 346 is a driving mechanism, and includes a first AF magnet 346a, a first AF coil 346b, a first X position detection magnet 346d, and a first AF controller 346c.
  • the second AF actuator 347 is a driving mechanism, and includes a second AF magnet 347a, a second AF coil 347b, a second X position detection magnet 347d, and a second AF controller 347c.
  • first AF actuator 346 and a second AF actuator 347 the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are fixed to the lens guide 341 which is a movable member, and the first AF coil 346b and the The second AF coil 347b is a moving magnet type actuator fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed side member.
  • the first AF actuator 346 and the second AF actuator 347 may be moving coil type actuators.
  • the arrangement of each unit constituting the AF actuator 345 will be described.
  • each of the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a is composed of two magnet elements (reference numerals are omitted) arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the Y direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and arranged so that the directions of the magnetic poles are opposite.
  • Each of the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the X direction and, for example, has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). .
  • the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b are so-called elliptical so-called air-core coils that are supplied with power during auto focus.
  • the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b are fixed to the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 of the FPC 344 via a substrate (not shown), respectively, in a state where the long axes are aligned with the Y direction. Have been.
  • the first AF coil 346b is connected to the first AF controller 346c via the first coil power supply lines L9 and L10.
  • the current value of the first AF coil 346b is controlled by the first AF controller 346c.
  • the first X position detection magnet 346d and the second X position detection magnet 347d are magnetized in the Z direction, and are, for example, rectangular parallelepipeds having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). is there. Such a first X position detection magnet 346d and a second X position detection magnet 347d are respectively held by a pair of third magnet holding portions 34b3, 34b4 of the lens guide 341.
  • the first AF controller 346c is fixed to the first controller fixing portion 34d6 of the FPC 344. As shown in FIG. 21, such a first AF controller 346c has a first detection unit 346e and a first drive control unit 346f.
  • the first detector 346e detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) between the first AF magnet 346a and the first X position detection magnet 346d.
  • the first detection unit 346e sends the detection value to the first drive control unit 346f.
  • the first drive control unit 346f obtains a position (also referred to as a first position) of the first AF magnet 346a in the X direction based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 346e. Then, the first drive control unit 346f controls the current value of the first AF coil 346b based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 346e. Note that the first AF controller 346c does not control the current value of the second AF coil 347b.
  • the closed loop control is performed based on the detection value of the first detection unit 346e.
  • the first drive control unit 346f may be omitted.
  • the processing performed by the first drive control unit 346f may be performed by, for example, the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
  • the second AF controller 347c is fixed to the second controller fixing portion 34d7 of the FPC 344. As shown in FIG. 21, the second AF controller 347c includes a second detection unit 347e and a second drive control unit 347f.
  • the second detector 347e detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) between the second AF magnet 347a and the second X position detection magnet 347d.
  • the second detector 347e sends the detected value to the second drive controller 347f.
  • the second drive control unit 347f obtains a position (also referred to as a second position) of the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction based on the detection value (information regarding the position) received from the second detection unit 347e. Further, the second drive control unit 347f controls the current value of the second AF coil 347b based on the detection value received from the second detection unit 347e. Note that the second AF controller 347c does not control the current value of the first AF coil 346b.
  • closed loop control is performed based on the detection value of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the second drive control unit 347f may be omitted.
  • the process performed by the second drive control unit 347f may be performed by, for example, the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
  • the current is supplied to the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b under the control of the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c. Flows, a Lorentz force (thrust) for displacing the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction is generated.
  • Such thrust is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lens guide 341 can be switched.
  • the current value of the first AF coil 346b of the first AF actuator 346 and the current value of the second AF coil 347b of the second AF actuator 347 are controlled independently, so that the first AF The thrust generated by the actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 can be made different.
  • the thrust generated by the AF actuator 345 includes only the first thrust in the X direction.
  • the thrust generated by the AF actuator 345 is equal to the first thrust in the X direction and the thrust of the movable member.
  • a second thrust which is a moment about the center of gravity G.
  • the second thrust is a resistance against an external force that tends to cause the lens guide 341 to deviate from the X direction during autofocus. This allows the AF actuator 345 to reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the X direction during autofocus.
  • the above-mentioned external force will be described later.
  • the AF actuator 345 resists an external force acting so as to deviate the movable member (the lens guide 341) from the Y direction when the second shake correction device 35 described later performs shake correction. It is also a second drive mechanism that generates a resistance force.
  • the AF actuator 345 controls the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction by the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c. The position at is detected.
  • the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c respectively control the current values of the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b based on the detected values. Accordingly, when the second shake correction device 35 performs shake correction, the AF actuator 345 generates a resistance to an external force that causes the lens guide 341 to deviate from the Y direction. As a result, the AF actuator 345 can reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the Y direction during shake correction.
  • the second shake correction device 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG.
  • the second shake correction device 35 is a drive unit, and performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction.
  • Such a second shake correction device 35 is disposed in the above-described second accommodation space 32c (see FIG. 2).
  • the second shake correction device 35 includes the above-described lens guide 341, the above-described plurality of springs 342a1 to 342a4, the above-described FPC 344, and the rear OIS actuator 351.
  • the lens guide 341, the springs 342a1 to 342a4, and the FPC 344 are common to the AF device 34.
  • the rear OIS actuator 351 (also referred to as a second actuator) is a driving mechanism, and includes a first OIS actuator 352 disposed on the + side in the Y direction and a second OIS actuator 353 disposed on the ⁇ side in the Y direction. Having.
  • the first OIS actuator 352 is a driving mechanism, and is arranged so as to overlap the first AF actuator 346 at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • a first OIS actuator 352 has a first OIS magnet 352a, a first OIS coil 352b, and a Y position detection magnet 352c.
  • the second OIS actuator 353 is a driving mechanism and is arranged so as to overlap the second AF actuator 347 at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • a second OIS actuator 353 has a second OIS magnet 353a, a second OIS coil 353b, a Y position detection magnet 353c, and an OIS Hall element 353d.
  • the center of the driving force of the rear OIS actuator 351 is adjusted to the AF actuator 345. To or near the center of the driving force.
  • This configuration makes it difficult for the lens guide 341 to undergo tilt displacement (that is, swing displacement about an axis parallel to the Y direction or the Z direction) during autofocus and shake correction.
  • the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are fixed to the lens guide 341 which is a movable member, and the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed.
  • the moving magnet type actuator is fixed to the second base 32 as a member.
  • the rear OIS actuator 351 may be a moving coil type actuator.
  • the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are held by the second magnet holding portion 34a7 and the second magnet holding portion 34a8 of the lens guide 341 respectively.
  • each of the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a is composed of two magnet elements (symbols omitted) arranged side by side in the Y direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and arranged so that the directions of the magnetic poles are opposite.
  • the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are each an elliptic so-called air-core coil that is supplied with power at the time of shake correction.
  • the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed to the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j of the second base 32, respectively, with their major axes aligned in the X direction. In this state, the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b overlap with the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a, respectively, at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • At least a part of the first OIS actuator 352 (the first OIS magnet 352a and the first OIS coil 352b) has the first overhang portion 34a1 and the second overhang portion 34a3 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction. It is located between.
  • at least a part of the second OIS actuator 353 (the second OIS magnet 353a and the second OIS coil 353b) is located between the first overhang portion 34a2 and the second overhang portion 34a4 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction. are located in Such a configuration is effective for reducing the height of the lens module 3 and thus the camera module 1.
  • the Y position detection magnet 352c is held by the fourth magnet holding portion 34b5 of the lens guide 341.
  • the Y position detection magnet 353c is held by the fourth magnet holding portion 34b6 of the lens guide 341.
  • the OIS Hall element 353d is fixed to the Hall element fixing portion 34d8 (see FIG. 19) of the FPC 344.
  • the OIS Hall element 353d detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the Y position detection magnet 353c, and sends a detection value to the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21) mounted on the sensor board 6.
  • the control unit 5 obtains the position of the Y position detection magnet 353c (that is, the lens guide 341) in the Y direction based on the detection value received from the OIS Hall element 353d.
  • the rear OIS actuator 351 having the above configuration, when a current flows through the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b via the FPC 344 under the control of the control unit 5, the first OIS magnet 352a and A Lorentz force for displacing the second OIS magnet 353a in the Y direction is generated. Since the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are each fixed to the lens guide 341, the lens guide 341 is displaced in the Y direction based on the Lorentz force. The direction of displacement of the lens guide 341 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b.
  • shield plates 7a and 7b made of magnetic metal are arranged.
  • the image sensor module 4 is arranged on the + side in the X direction with respect to the lens unit 33.
  • the image sensor module 4 includes an image sensor such as a charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor and a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) image sensor.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 captures a subject image formed by the lens unit 33 and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the subject image.
  • a sensor substrate 6 is electrically connected to the image sensor module 4, and power is supplied to the image sensor module 4 via the sensor substrate 6 and an electric signal of a subject image picked up by the image sensor module 4 is output.
  • Such an image sensor module 4 may have a conventionally known structure.
  • the second shake correcting device 35 When the second shake correcting device 35 performs shake correction, power is supplied to the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b. Specifically, in the second shake correction device 35, the first OIS is detected based on a detection signal from a shake detection unit (not shown, for example, a gyro sensor) so that the shake in the Y direction of the camera module 1 is canceled.
  • the current values of the coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are controlled. Such control is performed by the control unit 5, for example. At this time, the displacement of the lens guide 341 can be accurately controlled by feeding back the detection value of the OIS Hall element 353d to the control unit 5.
  • the direction of the Lorentz force is one of the directions in the Y direction or the other direction (also referred to as a specific direction). Since the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed to the second base 32, a reaction force acts on the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a. This reaction force becomes the driving force of the voice coil motor for OIS, and the lens guide 341 holding the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a is displaced in the Y direction on the XY plane, and shake correction is performed.
  • the above-described shake correction is preferably performed by displacing the lens guide 341 in parallel with the Y direction, for example, as indicated by an arrow AY1 in FIG.
  • an external force for example, a moment in the direction of arrow Af in FIG. 27
  • the lens guide 341 will turn to the arrow in FIG.
  • a Displacement occurs in a direction deviating from the Y direction as in A Y2 .
  • the external force described above for example, the center position of the distributed arrangement in the spring 342a1 ⁇ 342a4 constituting the first supporting mechanism 342 described above (the point of intersection of the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 in FIG. 18), the movable side of the above
  • the deviation may occur due to a deviation from the center of gravity G of the member.
  • the above-described external force is generated due to individual differences of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 constituting the first support mechanism 342, for example.
  • Such an external force may be, for example, a force directed in the X direction, in addition to the moment described above.
  • the external force may include a moment and a force directed in the X direction.
  • the AF actuator 345 is driven under the control of the control unit 5 to generate a resistance (second thrust) against the external force. Specifically, at the time of shake correction, the AF actuator 345 detects the position of the first AF magnet 346a by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first detection unit 346e), and also detects the position of the second AF controller 347c (that is, The position of the second AF magnet 347a is detected by the second detector 347e).
  • the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first drive control unit 346f) receives the control signal (for example, the displacement direction and the displacement amount for shake correction) received from the control unit 5 and the first detection unit 346e.
  • a current value of the first AF coil 346b (hereinafter, referred to as a first current value) is controlled based on the detected value.
  • the second AF controller 347c (that is, the second drive control unit 347f) performs a current value of the second AF coil 347b (hereinafter, referred to as a second current value) based on the detection value of the second detection unit 347e. Control.
  • the AF actuator 345 generates the above-described resistance (for example, moment) based on the thrust of the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust of the second AF actuator 347.
  • the first current value and the second current value are selected from the preliminary data stored in the first drive control unit 346f and the second drive control unit 347f by, for example, calibration performed in advance.
  • the preliminary data includes, for example, the displacement direction (for example, the direction of arrow A Y1 in FIG. 27) and the displacement amount D 1 (see FIG. 27) when the lens guide 341 is displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 35. ), A deviation direction of the lens guide 341 from the Y direction (for example, the direction of the arrow AY in FIG. 27), and a deviation correction parameter D 2 from the Y direction of the lens guide 341 (see FIG. 27).
  • Resistance force AF actuator 345 generates for the above-described external force, for example, a rotational moment in the direction of arrow A r in FIG. Then, the AF actuator 345 causes the generated resistance to act on the lens guide 341. As a result, the lens guide 341 exerted by the resultant force of the thrust parallel to the Y direction (also referred to as a specific direction) generated by the second shake correction device 35 and the resistance generated by the AF actuator 345 acts on the lens guide 341. In the operating state, it can be displaced parallel to the Y direction as indicated by an arrow A Y1 in FIG.
  • the AF device 34 When the AF device 34 performs autofocus, power is supplied to the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b.
  • the current value in the first AF coil 346b is controlled by the first AF controller 346c.
  • the current value in the second AF coil 347b is controlled by the second AF controller 347c.
  • the first AF controller 346c determines a second AF signal based on a control signal received from the control unit 5 via the first data signal line L5 and a detection value of the first detection unit 346e of the first AF controller 346c.
  • the current value (first current value) of one AF coil 346b is controlled.
  • the second AF controller 347c is configured to control the second AF coil based on the control signal received from the control unit 5 via the second data signal line L6 and the detection value of the second detection unit 347e of the second AF controller 347c.
  • the current value of 347b (second current value) is controlled.
  • the direction of the resultant force of each Lorentz force is one of the other in the X direction. It is. Since the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are fixed to the second base 32, a reaction force acts on the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b. This reaction force becomes the driving force of the voice coil motor for AF, and the lens guide 341 holding the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b moves in the X direction (the direction of the second optical axis), and the auto focus is performed. Is
  • an external force for example, a moment in the direction of arrow Af in FIG. 27
  • an external force that causes the displacement of the lens guide 341 to deviate from the X direction
  • an external force acts, if the thrust acting on the lens guide 341 is only the thrust parallel to the X direction (first thrust), the lens guide 341 is moved from the X direction as indicated by an arrow AX2 in FIG. It is displaced in a deviated direction.
  • Such an external force may be, for example, a force directed in the Y direction, in addition to the moment described above.
  • the external force may include a moment and a force directed in the Y direction.
  • the AF actuator 345 detects the position of the first AF magnet 346a by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first detection unit 346e), and also detects the position of the second AF controller 347c (that is, The position of the second AF magnet 347a is detected by the second detector 347e).
  • the AF actuator 345 controls the current value of the first AF coil 346b by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first drive control unit 346f), and also controls the second AF controller 347c (that is, the second drive control unit 347f). ) Controls the current value of the second AF coil 347b.
  • the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 are made different. Based on such a difference in thrust, the AF actuator 345 generates a thrust including a thrust parallel to the X direction (first thrust) and the above-described resistance (second thrust).
  • the thrust parallel to the X direction is a combined force of the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347.
  • the resistance force of the above (secondary thrust) is the a thrust first AF actuator 346 occurs, occurs on the basis of the difference between the thrusts second AF actuator 347 occurs moment (see arrow A r in FIG. 27) .
  • the first current value and the second current value are selected from preliminary data stored in the first drive control unit 346f and the second drive control unit 347f by, for example, calibration performed in advance.
  • the preliminary data for example, in the case of displacing the lens guide 341 in the X direction by the AF actuator 345, the displacement direction (e.g., the direction of the arrow Ax 1 in FIG. 27), the displacement amount D 3 (see FIG. 27), the lens departure direction of the X direction guides 341 (e.g., arrow a X direction in FIG. 27) and the AF parameter consisting deviation amount D 4 (see FIG.
  • the first current value and the second current value corresponding to the AF parameters are obtained in the range of the entire stroke of the lens guide 341 in the X direction.
  • Resistance force AF actuator 345 generates for the above-described external force, for example, a rotational moment in the direction of arrow A r in FIG. Then, the AF actuator 345 causes the generated thrust (the resultant force of the first thrust and the second thrust) to act on the lens guide 341. As a result, the lens guide 341 to which such a thrust has acted can be displaced in parallel with the X direction as indicated by an arrow Ax1 in FIG. 27 in a state where the external force acts.
  • the lens guide 341 is inclined with respect to the Y direction and the Z direction (specifically, the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n) in the stopped state. May be applied. Such a force is generated due to an assembly error or an individual difference between the springs 342a1 to 342a4 constituting the first support mechanism 342. If such a tilt exists, the lens guide 341 will be displaced while maintaining this tilt during autofocusing.
  • the impact transmitted from the first base 22 that is the fixed member to the holder 25 that is the movable member is a pair of swing support springs. Alleviated by 26A and 26B.
  • the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (specifically, the straight portions 26d and 26e) constitute the first shaft 29L that is the swing center of the holder 25.
  • the holder 25 is supported so as to float on the first base 22 (floating support), there is no hard contact point between the holder 25 and the first base 22. Therefore, when an impact is applied to the camera module 1, no indentation or the like based on the impact is generated on the holder 25 or the first base 22.
  • Embodiment 2 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG.
  • the camera module of the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in the structure of the rear OIS actuator 351B of the second shake correction device.
  • the camera module of the present embodiment will be described focusing on a structure different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the rear OIS actuator 351B is a drive mechanism, and includes a first OIS actuator 352B arranged on the + side in the Y direction and a second OIS actuator 353B arranged on the-side in the Y direction.
  • the first OIS actuator 352B has a first OIS magnet 352a and a pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2.
  • the first OIS magnet 352a is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2 are so-called air-core coils each having an elliptical shape to be supplied with power during shake correction.
  • Each of the pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2 is fixed to the coil mounting portion 32i of the second base 32 in a state where the major axes coincide with each other in the X direction.
  • the second OIS actuator 353B has a second OIS magnet 353a, a pair of second OIS coils 353b1, 353b2, a first OIS controller 353e, and a second OIS controller 353f.
  • the second OIS magnet 353a is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of second OIS coils 353b1 and 353b2 are so-called elliptic air-core coils that are supplied with power at the time of shake correction.
  • Each of the pair of second OIS coils 353b1 and 353b2 is fixed to the coil mounting portion 32j of the second base 32 in a state where the major axes coincide with each other in the X direction.
  • the second OIS coil 353b1 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b1.
  • the second OIS coil 353b2 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b2.
  • the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 are connected to the first OIS controller 353e via the first coil power supply lines L9a and L10a.
  • the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 are controlled by the first OIS controller 353e.
  • the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 are connected to the second OIS controller 353f via the second coil power supply lines L11a and L12a.
  • the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 are controlled by the second OIS controller 353f.
  • the first OIS controller 353e is fixed to the FPC 344B. Such a first OIS controller 353e has a first detection unit 353g and a first drive control unit 353h.
  • the first detection unit 353g detects the magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the second OIS magnet 353a at the position where the first detection unit 353g is fixed.
  • the first detection unit 353g sends the detection value to the first drive control unit 353h.
  • the first drive control unit 353h controls the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1, based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 353g. Note that the first drive control unit 353h does not control the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2.
  • the second OIS controller 353f is fixed to the FPC 344B. Such a second OIS controller 353f has a second detection unit 353i and a second drive control unit 353j.
  • the second detector 353i detects the magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the second OIS magnet 353a at the position where the second detector 353i is fixed.
  • the second detection unit 353i sends the detection value to the second drive control unit 353j.
  • the second drive control unit 353j controls the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 based on the detection value received from the second detection unit 353i. Note that the second drive control unit 353j does not control the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1.
  • the rear OIS actuator 351B as described above is connected to the control unit 5 by an OIS drive control circuit 344c as shown in FIG.
  • the OIS drive control circuit 344c is provided in the FPC 344B.
  • the OIS drive control circuit 344c includes a first power line L1a, a second power line L2a, a first ground line L3a, a second ground line L4a, a first data signal line L5a, and a second data signal. It has a line L6a, a first clock line L7a, a second clock line L8a, first coil power supply lines L9a and L10a, and second coil power supply lines L11a and L12a.
  • Such an OIS drive control circuit 344c is substantially the same as the AF drive control circuit 344b in the first embodiment. Therefore, a detailed description of the OIS drive control circuit 344c is omitted.
  • the description of the AF drive control circuit 344b in the first embodiment can be appropriately replaced.
  • the configuration of the present embodiment as described above is achieved by independently controlling the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 and the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2.
  • a second OIS coil 353b2, a first OIS magnet 352a, and an actuator (hereinafter, referred to as a second actuator) constituted by the second OIS magnet 353a can be made to have a different thrust.
  • the thrust generated by the rear OIS actuator 351B includes only the first thrust in the Y direction.
  • the thrust generated by the rear OIS actuator 351B is the thrust generated by the first actuator and the thrust generated by the second actuator. It has a first thrust in the Y direction, which is a resultant force, and a second thrust, which is a moment about the center of gravity G of the movable member generated based on this resultant force.
  • the second thrust is a resistance against an external force that tends to cause the lens guide 341 to deviate from the Y direction during shake correction. This allows the rear OIS actuator 351B to reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the X direction during shake correction.
  • Other configurations, operations, and effects are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the operation of the camera module according to the present embodiment at the time of shake correction may be appropriately replaced with the operation of the camera module according to the first embodiment.
  • the configuration of the present embodiment can be implemented in combination with the configuration of the above-described first embodiment as appropriate within a technically consistent range.
  • the camera module elastically supports the movable member with respect to the fixed member, and the movable member can be displaced in the XY plane with respect to the fixed member. And a second support mechanism that supports the Z-direction so as not to be displaced.
  • the configuration of the support mechanism that supports the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member is not limited to the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism described above.
  • the lens module 3B illustrated in FIG. 31 has a configuration in which the first support mechanism 342 (see FIGS. 13C, 14, and 18) is omitted from the lens module 3 of the above-described first and second embodiments. .
  • the lens module 3B shown in FIG. 31 has a second support mechanism 343 (FIGS. 13C and 13C) in the first and second embodiments described above as a support mechanism for supporting the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member. 14 (see FIG. 14).
  • the structure of the second support mechanism 343 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
  • the configuration corresponding to the first support mechanism 342 for example, the spring arrangement portions 32m1 to 32m4 of the second base 32, etc. 13C and FIG. 14).
  • the lens module has only the first support mechanism 342 in the first and second embodiments as a support mechanism for supporting the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member. May be.
  • the first support mechanism that elastically supports the movable member with respect to the fixed member may be configured by a plurality of suspension wires (not shown) instead of the spring disposition portions 32m1 to 32m4.
  • a smartphone that is a mobile terminal with a camera has been described as an example of a camera-equipped device including the camera module 1, but the present invention has been obtained with a camera module and a camera module.
  • the present invention can be applied to a camera mounted device having an image processing unit for processing image information.
  • the camera-mounted device includes an information device and a transport device.
  • the information devices include, for example, a camera-equipped mobile phone, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, a web camera, and a camera-equipped in-vehicle device (eg, a back monitor device, a drive recorder device).
  • the transportation device includes, for example, an automobile.
  • FIGS. 33A and 33B are diagrams showing an automobile V as a camera-mounted device equipped with a vehicle-mounted camera module VC (Vehicle-Camera).
  • FIG. 33A is a front view of the vehicle V
  • FIG. 33B is a rear perspective view of the vehicle V.
  • the vehicle V mounts the camera module 1 described in the embodiment as the vehicle-mounted camera module VC.
  • the vehicle-mounted camera module VC is attached to, for example, a windshield toward the front or to a rear gate toward the rear.
  • the vehicle-mounted camera module VC is used for a back monitor, a drive recorder, a collision avoidance control, an automatic driving control, and the like.
  • the configurations of the voice col motor for AF and the voice coil motor for OIS in the present invention are not limited to those described in the above embodiments.
  • an elastic support member made of an elastomer or the like is used instead of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 of the first support mechanism 342 shown in each of the above embodiments. It can also be applied.
  • the present invention can be applied to a lens driving device having only an AF function without an OIS function. Further, the present invention can be applied to a lens driving device having only an OIS function without having an AF function.
  • the camera actuator and camera module according to the present invention can be mounted on a thin camera-mounted device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, and a vehicle-mounted camera.
  • a thin camera-mounted device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, and a vehicle-mounted camera.

Abstract

A camera actuator comprises: a fixed-side member; a light path bending member that bends light that is incident along a first direction in a second direction; a movable-side member that holds the light path bending member; a first actuator that causes the movable-side member to swing in relation to the fixed-side member about a swinging center axis that is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction; and an elastic support member that elastically supports the movable-side member in relation to the fixed-side member, the elastic support member comprising a first fixed part that is fixed to the movable-side member in a position corresponding to the position of the swinging center axis, a pair of second fixed parts that sandwich the position of the swinging center axis and are fixed to the fixed-side member at mutually separated positions, and connection parts that extend from each of the pair of second fixed parts toward the position of the swinging center axis and connect to the first fixed part.

Description

カメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device
　本発明は、カメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device.
　従来、スマートフォンやデジタルカメラなど、カメラモジュールを搭載した薄型のカメラ搭載装置が知られている。カメラモジュールは、１以上のレンズを有するレンズ部と、レンズ部により結像された被写体像を撮像する撮像素子とを備える。 Conventionally, thin camera-equipped devices, such as smartphones and digital cameras, equipped with a camera module have been known. The camera module includes a lens unit having one or more lenses, and an image sensor that captures a subject image formed by the lens unit.
　また、レンズ部の前段に設けられた光路屈曲部材であるプリズムにより、第一光軸に沿う被写体からの光を第二光軸の方向に屈曲して後段のレンズ部に導光する屈曲光学系を備えるカメラモジュールも提案されている（例えば、特許文献１）。 In addition, a bending optical system that bends light from a subject along the first optical axis in the direction of the second optical axis and guides the light to the subsequent lens unit by a prism that is an optical path bending member provided at the front stage of the lens unit. There is also proposed a camera module including (for example, Patent Document 1).
　特許文献１に開示されたカメラモジュールは、カメラに生じる手振れを補正する振れ補正装置、および、オートフォーカスを行うオートフォーカス装置を備えている。このようなカメラモジュールは、カメラ用アクチュエータとして振れ補正用アクチュエータおよびオートフォーカス用アクチュエータを有する。このうちの振れ補正用アクチュエータは、異なる二軸を中心にプリズムを揺動させる第一アクチュエータおよび第二アクチュエータを備えている。カメラに手振れが生じると、制御部の制御下で振れ補正用アクチュエータがプリズムを揺動させて振れ補正を行う。これによりカメラに生じた手振れが補正される。 The camera module disclosed in Patent Literature 1 includes a shake correction device that corrects camera shake that occurs in a camera, and an autofocus device that performs autofocus. Such a camera module has a shake correction actuator and an autofocus actuator as camera actuators. The shake correcting actuator includes a first actuator and a second actuator that swing the prism about two different axes. When a camera shake occurs in the camera, the shake correction actuator swings the prism under the control of the control unit to perform the shake correction. As a result, camera shake caused by the camera is corrected.
特開２０１５－９２２８５号公報JP-A-2005-92285
　ところで、上述のような特許文献１に開示されたカメラ用アクチュエータの場合、プリズムを保持する可動側部材は、固定側部材に揺動可能な状態で直接的に支持されている。このため、たとえば、カメラ用アクチュエータが搭載されたカメラ搭載装置に衝撃が加わった場合に、当該衝撃が、固定側部材から可動側部材に伝わり、可動側部材が損傷し易くなる可能性がある。このような損傷が可動側部材に生じると、上述の振れ補正の精度が低下してしまう可能性がある。 By the way, in the case of the camera actuator disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, the movable-side member holding the prism is directly supported by the fixed-side member in a swingable state. For this reason, for example, when an impact is applied to a camera mounting device on which a camera actuator is mounted, the impact may be transmitted from the fixed member to the movable member, and the movable member may be easily damaged. If such damage occurs in the movable member, the accuracy of the above-described shake correction may be reduced.
　本発明の目的は、固定側部材から可動側部材に伝わる衝撃を緩和できるカメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置を提供することである。 An object of the present invention is to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can reduce an impact transmitted from a fixed member to a movable member.
　本発明に係るカメラ用アクチュエータの一態様は、固定側部材と、第一方向に沿う入射光を第二方向に屈曲させる光路屈曲部材と、光路屈曲部材を保持する可動側部材と、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を、第一方向および第二方向に直交する揺動中心軸を中心として揺動させる第一アクチュエータと、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を弾性的に支持する弾性支持部材と、を備え、弾性支持部材は、揺動中心軸の位置に対応する位置で可動側部材に固定される第一固定部と、揺動中心軸の位置を挟んで互いに離間した位置で固定側部材に固定される一対の第二固定部と、一対の第二固定部からそれぞれ揺動中心軸の位置へ向けて延びて第一固定部に接続する接続部と、を備える。 One aspect of the camera actuator according to the present invention includes a fixed member, an optical path bending member that bends incident light along a first direction in a second direction, a movable member that holds the optical path bending member, and a fixed member. A first actuator for swinging the movable member about a swing center axis perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction, and an elastic support for elastically supporting the movable member relative to the fixed member. A first fixing portion fixed to the movable member at a position corresponding to the position of the swing center axis, and fixed at a position separated from each other with the position of the swing center axis therebetween. The vehicle includes a pair of second fixing portions fixed to the side member, and a connecting portion extending from the pair of second fixing portions toward the position of the swing center axis and connecting to the first fixing portion.
　本発明に係るカメラモジュールの一態様は、上述のカメラ用アクチュエータと、レンズ部の後段に配置された撮像素子と、を備える。 の 一 One embodiment of the camera module according to the present invention includes the above-described camera actuator and an imaging element arranged at a stage subsequent to the lens unit.
　本発明に係るカメラ搭載装置の一態様は、上述のカメラモジュールと、当該カメラモジュールを制御する制御部と、を有する。 の 一 One embodiment of a camera-mounted device according to the present invention includes the above-described camera module and a control unit that controls the camera module.
　本発明によれば、固定側部材から可動側部材に伝わる衝撃を緩和できるカメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置を提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device capable of reducing an impact transmitted from a fixed member to a movable member.
図１Ａは、本発明の実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの正面図である。FIG. 1A is a front view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 図１Ｂは、実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの背面図である。FIG. 1B is a rear view of the camera module according to the first embodiment. 図１Ｃは、実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの平面図である。FIG. 1C is a plan view of the camera module according to the first embodiment. 図１Ｄは、実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの底面図である。FIG. 1D is a bottom view of the camera module according to the first embodiment. 図１Ｅは、本発明の実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの右側面図である。FIG. 1E is a right side view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 図１Ｆは、本発明の実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの左側面図である。FIG. 1F is a left side view of the camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 図２は、本発明の実施形態に係るカメラモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the camera module according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図３は、カメラモジュールのプリズムモジュールを一部の部材を省略した状態で示す斜視図である。FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the prism module of the camera module with some members omitted. 図４は、一部の部材を省略したプリズムモジュールを図３と別角度から見た状態で示す斜視図である。FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a prism module in which some members are omitted when viewed from a different angle from FIG. 図５は、第一ベースにホルダを組み付けた状態の斜視図である。FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a state where the holder is assembled to the first base. 図６は、第一ベースの斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the first base. 図７は、第一ベースの平面図である。FIG. 7 is a plan view of the first base. 図８は、揺動支持バネのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing only the swing support spring. 図９は、プリズムモジュールの断面図である。FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the prism module. 図１０は、ホルダの斜視図である。FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the holder. 図１１は、ホルダの底面図である。FIG. 11 is a bottom view of the holder. 図１２は、図３のＰ部の拡大側面図である。FIG. 12 is an enlarged side view of a portion P in FIG. 図１３Ａは、レンズモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 13A is a perspective view of the lens module. 図１３Ｂは、図１３Ａと別角度から見た、レンズモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the lens module viewed from a different angle from FIG. 13A. 図１３Ｃは、一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 13C is a perspective view of the lens module in which some members are omitted. 図１４は、一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールを図１３Ｃと別角度から見た状態で示す斜視図である。FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a lens module in which some members are omitted when viewed from a different angle from FIG. 13C. 図１５は、第二ベースを省略したレンズモジュールの側面図である。FIG. 15 is a side view of the lens module from which the second base is omitted. 図１６は、第二ベースを省略したレンズモジュールを、図１５と反対側から見た状態で示す側面図である。FIG. 16 is a side view showing the lens module from which the second base is omitted when viewed from the opposite side to FIG. 図１７は、一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールに関する、図１５のＡ１矢視図である。Figure 17 is a lens module that omit some members are A 1 arrow view of FIG. 15. 図１８は、スプリングを組付状態の配置のまま取り出して示す斜視図である。FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the spring taken out in an assembled state. 図１９は、ＦＰＣ、ＡＦアクチュエータ、および後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータの斜視図である。FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the FPC, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator. 図２０は、図１９と別角度から見た、ＦＰＣ、ＡＦアクチュエータ、および後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータの斜視図である。FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the FPC, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator viewed from a different angle from FIG. 図２１は、ＡＦ駆動制御回路の回路図である。FIG. 21 is a circuit diagram of the AF drive control circuit. 図２２は、第二ベースの斜視図である。FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the second base. 図２３は、図２２と別角度から見た、第二ベースの斜視図である。FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the second base viewed from a different angle from FIG. 図２４は、第二ベースの分解斜視図である。FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the second base. 図２５は、第二ベース、ＡＦアクチュエータ、および後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータの斜視図である。FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the second base, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator. 図２６は、図２５とは別角度から見た、第二ベース、ＡＦアクチュエータ、および後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータの斜視図である。FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the second base, the AF actuator, and the rear OIS actuator, as viewed from a different angle from FIG. 図２７は、一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールの平面図である。FIG. 27 is a plan view of the lens module in which some members are omitted. 図２８は、レンズガイドおよび基準部材の平面模式図である。FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the lens guide and the reference member. 図２９は、実施形態２に係るレンズモジュールを一部を省略した状態で示す平面図である。FIG. 29 is a plan view showing the lens module according to the second embodiment in a state where a part is omitted. 図３０は、ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路の回路図である。FIG. 30 is a circuit diagram of the OIS drive control circuit. 図３１は、レンズモジュールの変形例１を示す斜視図である。FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing Modification Example 1 of the lens module. 図３２Ａは、カメラモジュールを搭載したカメラ搭載装置の一例を示す正面図である。FIG. 32A is a front view illustrating an example of a camera-mounted device equipped with a camera module. 図３２Ｂは、カメラモジュールを搭載したカメラ搭載装置の一例を示す背面図である。FIG. 32B is a rear view illustrating an example of a camera-mounted device equipped with a camera module. 図３３Ａは、車載用カメラモジュールを搭載する自動車の正面図である。FIG. 33A is a front view of an automobile on which the on-vehicle camera module is mounted. 図３３Ｂは、車載用カメラモジュールを搭載する自動車の斜視図である。FIG. 33B is a perspective view of an automobile equipped with the vehicle-mounted camera module.
　以下、本発明に係る実施形態を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
　［実施形態１］
　図１Ａ～図２８を参照して、本発明の実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。図１Ａ～図１Ｆは、カメラモジュール１の外観（意匠）を示す六面図である。 [Embodiment 1]
A camera module according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 28. 1A to 1F are six views showing the appearance (design) of the camera module 1. FIG.
　以下、カメラモジュール１の概要について説明した後、カメラモジュール１が備えるプリズムモジュール２、レンズモジュール３、および撮像素子モジュール４の具体的構造について説明する。なお、本発明に係るカメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置は、後述する全ての構成を備えてもよいし、一部の構成を備えなくてもよい。 Hereinafter, after describing the outline of the camera module 1, the specific structures of the prism module 2, the lens module 3, and the imaging element module 4 included in the camera module 1 will be described. Note that the camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device according to the present invention may include all configurations described below or may not include some configurations.
　＜カメラモジュール＞
　カメラモジュール１は、たとえばスマートフォンＭ（図３２Ａ、図３２Ｂ参照）、携帯電話機、デジタルカメラ、ノート型パソコン、タブレット端末、および携帯型ゲーム機などの携帯側のカメラ搭載装置、ならびに、車載カメラを搭載した自動車などのカメラ搭載装置に搭載される。 <Camera module>
The camera module 1 includes, for example, a mobile-side camera mounting device such as a smartphone M (see FIGS. 32A and 32B), a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, and a mobile game machine, and a vehicle-mounted camera. Mounted on camera-mounted devices such as automobiles.
　以下、本実施形態のカメラモジュール１を構成する各部については、カメラモジュール１に組み込まれた状態を基準として説明する。また、本実施形態のカメラモジュール１の構造を説明するにあたり、各図に示された直交座標系（Ｘ，Ｙ，Ｚ）を使用する。 Hereinafter, each part constituting the camera module 1 of the present embodiment will be described based on the state of being incorporated in the camera module 1. In describing the structure of the camera module 1 of the present embodiment, the rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) shown in each drawing is used.
　カメラモジュール１は、カメラ搭載装置で実際に撮影が行われる場合に、たとえばＸ方向が左右方向、Ｙ方向が上下方向、Ｚ方向が前後方向となるように搭載される。被写体からの光は、図３に一点鎖線α（第一光軸ともいう。）で示されるように、Ｚ方向＋側（プラス側）からプリズムモジュール２のプリズム２３に入射する。プリズム２３に入射した光は、図３および図１３Ｃに一点鎖線β（第二光軸ともいう。）で示されるように、プリズム２３の光路屈曲面２３１（図９参照）で屈曲して、プリズム２３よりも後段（つまり、Ｘ方向＋側）に配置されたレンズモジュール３のレンズ部３３（図１３Ｃ参照）へと導光される。そして、レンズ部３３により結像された被写体像が、レンズモジュール３の後段に配置された撮像素子モジュール４（図２参照）により撮像される。 The camera module 1 is mounted such that, for example, when an image is actually taken by a camera mounting device, the X direction is the horizontal direction, the Y direction is the vertical direction, and the Z direction is the front and rear direction. Light from the subject enters the prism 23 of the prism module 2 from the + side (plus side) in the Z direction, as indicated by a dashed line α (also referred to as a first optical axis) in FIG. The light that has entered the prism 23 bends at an optical path bending surface 231 (see FIG. 9) of the prism 23, as shown by a chain line β (also referred to as a second optical axis) in FIGS. The light is guided to the lens unit 33 (see FIG. 13C) of the lens module 3 disposed downstream of (ie, on the + side in the X direction). Then, the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 is captured by the image sensor module 4 (see FIG. 2) disposed downstream of the lens module 3.
　上述のカメラモジュール１は、プリズムモジュール２に組み込まれた第一振れ補正装置２４（図３参照）、および、レンズモジュール３に組み込まれた第二振れ補正装置３５（図１５参照）により、振れ補正（ＯＩＳ：Optical Image Stabilization）を行う。また、上述のカメラモジュール１は、レンズモジュール３に組み込まれたＡＦ装置３４（図１５参照）によりレンズ部３３をＸ方向に変位させて、オートフォーカスを行う。 The camera module 1 described above is shake-corrected by a first shake correction device 24 (see FIG. 3) incorporated in the prism module 2 and a second shake correction device 35 (see FIG. 15) incorporated in the lens module 3. (OIS: Optical Image Stabilization). The camera module 1 performs autofocus by displacing the lens unit 33 in the X direction by the AF device 34 (see FIG. 15) incorporated in the lens module 3.
　＜プリズムモジュール＞
　図１Ａ～図１２を参照してプリズムモジュール２について説明する。プリズムモジュール２は、第一カバー２１、第一ベース２２、プリズム２３、および第一振れ補正装置２４を備える。 <Prism module>
The prism module 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 12. The prism module 2 includes a first cover 21, a first base 22, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24.
　＜第一カバー＞
　第一カバー２１は、図１Ａ～図２に示されるように、たとえば合成樹脂製または非磁性金属製であり、Ｚ方向両側およびＸ方向＋側が開口した箱状である。被写体側からの光は、第一カバー２１のＺ方向＋側の開口部を通過して第一カバー２１の内部空間に侵入可能である。以上のような第一カバー２１は、後述する第一ベース２２にＺ方向＋側から組み合わされている。 <First cover>
As shown in FIGS. 1A and 2, the first cover 21 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a non-magnetic metal, and has a box shape opened on both sides in the Z direction and on the + side in the X direction. Light from the subject side can pass through the opening of the first cover 21 in the + Z direction and enter the internal space of the first cover 21. The first cover 21 as described above is combined with a first base 22 described later from the + side in the Z direction.
　＜第一ベース＞
　図６および図７を参照して第一ベース２２について説明する。第一ベース２２は、Ｚ方向＋側およびＸ方向＋側がそれぞれ開口した箱状である。第一ベース２２は、Ｚ方向－側の底壁部２２ａに、ベース側開口部２２ｂを有する。 <First base>
The first base 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. The first base 22 has a box shape with an opening on the + side in the Z direction and the + side on the X direction. The first base 22 has a base-side opening 22b in the bottom wall 22a on the negative side in the Z direction.
　本実施形態の場合、ベース側開口部２２ｂに、前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７の第一コイル２７ｃおよび第一ホール素子２７ｅが配置されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, the first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e of the front OIS actuator 27 are arranged in the base-side opening 22b.
　第一ベース２２は、後述の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂを介して、第一振れ補正装置２４のホルダ２５を、Ｙ方向に平行な第一軸２９Ｌ（揺動中心軸ともいう。図６参照）を中心とした揺動を可能に支持している。第一ベース２２は、Ｙ方向に離隔しかつ対向した一対の第一側壁部２２０、２２１を有する。また、第一ベース２２は、一対の第一側壁部２２０、２２１のＸ方向－側の端部同士を接続する接続壁部２２２を有する。 The first base 22 holds the holder 25 of the first shake correction device 24 via swing support springs 26A and 26B, which will be described later, on a first shaft 29L (also referred to as a swing center axis, which is parallel to the Y direction; see FIG. 6). ) Is supported. The first base 22 has a pair of first side walls 220 and 221 that are separated from each other in the Y direction and face each other. In addition, the first base 22 has a connection wall 222 that connects ends of the pair of first side walls 220 and 221 on the − side in the X direction.
　第一側壁部２２０、２２１はそれぞれ、上面におけるＸ方向両端部に、第一位置決め凸部２２ｃおよび第二位置決め凸部２２ｄを有する。第一位置決め凸部２２ｃおよび第二位置決め凸部２２ｄはそれぞれ、後述する一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂ（図８参照）と係合して、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂを位置決めしている。 The first side walls 220 and 221 each have a first positioning projection 22c and a second positioning projection 22d at both ends in the X direction on the upper surface. The first positioning protrusion 22c and the second positioning protrusion 22d respectively engage with a pair of swing support springs 26A, 26B (see FIG. 8) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 26A, 26B. ing.
　＜第一振れ補正装置＞
　図５～図９を参照して第一振れ補正装置２４について説明する。第一振れ補正装置２４は、第一アクチュエータであって、Ｙ方向に平行な第一軸２９Ｌ（図６参照）を中心にプリズム２３を揺動させて、第一軸２９Ｌを中心とした回転方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第一振れ補正装置２４は、第一ベース２２と第一カバー２１とで覆われる第一収容空間２２３（図９参照）に配置されている。 <First shake correction device>
The first shake correction device 24 will be described with reference to FIGS. The first shake correction device 24 is a first actuator, and swings the prism 23 about a first axis 29L (see FIG. 6) parallel to the Y direction to rotate the prism 23 about the first axis 29L. Is performed. Such a first shake correction device 24 is disposed in a first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 9) covered by the first base 22 and the first cover 21.
　第一振れ補正装置２４は、ホルダ２５、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂ、および前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７などを備える。 The first shake correction device 24 includes a holder 25, a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B, a front OIS actuator 27, and the like.
　第一振れ補正装置２４において、ホルダ２５は、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂを介して、第一ベース２２に変位可能（具体的には、揺動可能）に支持されている。この状態でホルダ２５は、前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７の駆動力（具体的には、Ｘ方向の推力）に基づいて第一軸２９Ｌを中心に揺動する。制御部５（図２１参照）の制御下で前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７が駆動すると、ホルダ２５およびプリズム２３が、第一軸２９Ｌを中心に揺動する。これにより、第一軸２９Ｌを中心とした回転方向の振れが補正される。以下、第一振れ補正装置２４が備える各部材の具体的構造について説明する。 In the first shake correction device 24, the holder 25 is supported by the first base 22 via a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B so as to be displaceable (specifically, swingable). In this state, the holder 25 swings about the first shaft 29L based on the driving force of the front OIS actuator 27 (specifically, the thrust in the X direction). When the front OIS actuator 27 is driven under the control of the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21), the holder 25 and the prism 23 swing about the first shaft 29L. Thereby, the shake in the rotation direction about the first shaft 29L is corrected. Hereinafter, a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24 will be described.
　＜ホルダ＞
　図５および図９～図１１を参照して、ホルダ２５について説明する。ホルダ２５は、たとえば、合成樹脂製であって、プリズム２３を保持している。ホルダ２５とプリズム２３とは、後述の一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂを介して、第一ベース２２に揺動可能に支持されている。 <Holder>
The holder 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 and FIGS. The holder 25 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin and holds the prism 23. The holder 25 and the prism 23 are swingably supported by the first base 22 via a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B described later.
　ホルダ２５は、載置面２５ａ、一対の対向壁部２５ｂ、２５ｃ、一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅ、および接続壁部２５ｋを備える。 The holder 25 includes a mounting surface 25a, a pair of opposing walls 25b and 25c, a pair of overhangs 25d and 25e, and a connection wall 25k.
　載置面２５ａは、プリズム２３の光路屈曲面２３１に裏側（Ｚ方向－側）から対面する。載置面２５ａは、たとえば、光路屈曲面２３１と平行な面を有する。なお、載置面２５ａは、本実施形態の構造に限定されず、たとえば、プリズム２３を位置決めすることが可能なボスなどでもよい。 (4) The mounting surface 25a faces the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 from the back side (negative side in the Z direction). The mounting surface 25a has, for example, a surface parallel to the optical path bending surface 231. The mounting surface 25a is not limited to the structure of the present embodiment, and may be, for example, a boss capable of positioning the prism 23.
　一対の対向壁部２５ｂ、２５ｃはそれぞれ、ＸＺ平面に平行な板部材であって、Ｙ方向に離隔した状態で配置されている。このような一対の対向壁部２５ｂ、２５ｃは、載置面２５ａをＹ方向から挟んで配置されている。 The pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c are plate members parallel to the XZ plane, and are arranged separated from each other in the Y direction. Such a pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c are arranged so as to sandwich the mounting surface 25a from the Y direction.
　一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅはそれぞれ、一対の対向壁部２５ｂ、２５ｃに設けられている。このような一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅはそれぞれ、ホルダ２５を、第一ベース２２に対して揺動可能に支持している。 A pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e are provided on a pair of opposing wall portions 25b and 25c, respectively. Such a pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e respectively support the holder 25 so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22.
　具体的には、一方（つまり、Ｙ方向＋側）の張出し部２５ｄは、対向壁部２５ｂのＹ方向＋側面に設けられ、当該側面からＹ方向＋側に張り出している。 Specifically, one (that is, the + side in the Y direction) protrusion 25d is provided on the + side in the Y direction of the opposing wall 25b, and projects from the side in the + side in the Y direction.
　一方、他方（つまり、Ｙ方向－側）の張出し部２５ｅは、対向壁部２５ｃのＹ方向－側面に設けられ、当該側面からＹ方向－側に張り出している。また、一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅはそれぞれ、裏面（つまり、Ｚ方向－側の面）に、平坦面状のバネ座面２５ｆ、２５ｇ（図１１参照）を有する。バネ座面２５ｆ、２５ｇはそれぞれ、Ｘ方向に離隔した２箇所に、Ｚ方向－側に突出した一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部２５ｈ、２５ｉ（図１１参照）を有する。 One (ie, the Y-direction) overhang portion 25e is provided on the Y-direction-side surface of the opposing wall 25c, and projects from the side surface in the Y-direction side. Further, the pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e respectively have flat spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g (see FIG. 11) on the back surface (that is, the surface on the minus side in the Z direction). Each of the spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g has a pair of holder- side positioning projections 25h and 25i (see FIG. 11) protruding in the negative direction in the Z direction at two locations separated in the X direction.
　バネ座面２５ｆ、２５ｇにはそれぞれ、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの第一固定部２６２のＺ方向＋側の面が接着固定されている。この状態で、一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部２５ｈ、２５ｉはそれぞれ、揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの一対の第二貫通孔２６ｃに挿通されている。この構造により、ホルダ２５は、第一ベース２２に対して揺動可能に支持されている。 The surfaces of the first fixing portions 262 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B on the + Z direction side are adhesively fixed to the spring seat surfaces 25f and 25g, respectively. In this state, the pair of holder- side positioning projections 25h and 25i are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c of the swing support springs 26A and 26B, respectively. With this structure, the holder 25 is swingably supported with respect to the first base 22.
　接続壁部２５ｋは、一対の対向壁部２５ｂ、２５ｃのＸ方向－側の端部同士をＹ方向に接続している。 The connection wall 25k connects the ends of the pair of opposing walls 25b and 25c on the negative side in the X direction in the Y direction.
　また、ホルダ２５は、裏面に、後述の第一マグネット２７ａを保持するためのマグネット保持部２５ｊ（図９参照）を有する。 ホ ル ダ Further, the holder 25 has a magnet holding portion 25j (see FIG. 9) for holding a first magnet 27a described later on the back surface.
　＜揺動支持バネ＞
　図８を参照して、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂ（弾性支持部材ともいう。）について説明する。一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂはそれぞれ、後述するホルダ２５を、第一ベース２２に対して弾性的に支持している。また、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂはそれぞれ、ホルダ２５を、第一ベース２２に対して第一軸２９Ｌ（図６参照）を中心とした揺動を可能に支持している。 <Swinging support spring>
With reference to FIG. 8, a pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (also referred to as elastic support members) will be described. Each of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B elastically supports a holder 25 to be described later with respect to the first base 22. The pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B respectively support the holder 25 so as to be swingable about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6) with respect to the first base 22.
　一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂはそれぞれ、金属製の板バネであって、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０、２２１の上面と、ホルダ２５の一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅの下面との間に配置されている。 The pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B are metal leaf springs, respectively, and have an upper surface of the first side wall portions 220 and 221 of the first base 22 and a lower surface of the pair of overhang portions 25d and 25e of the holder 25. It is located between.
　以下、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂのうち一方（つまり、Ｙ方向＋側）の揺動支持バネ２６Ａについて説明する。他方（つまり、Ｙ方向－側）の揺動支持バネ２６Ｂは、一方の揺動支持バネ２６ＡとＹ方向に対称である。このため、揺動支持バネ２６Ｂの構成のうち、揺動支持バネ２６Ａと同一の構成については、同一の符号を付す。 Hereinafter, the swing support spring 26A of one of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (that is, the Y direction + side) will be described. The other swing support spring 26B (that is, the minus side in the Y direction) is symmetric in the Y direction with one swing support spring 26A. For this reason, among the configurations of the swing support spring 26B, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the swing support spring 26A.
　揺動支持バネ２６Ａは、第一固定部２６２、一対の第二固定部２６０、２６１、および一対の接続部２６３、２６４など、を有する。 The swing support spring 26A has a first fixing portion 262, a pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261, a pair of connecting portions 263 and 264, and the like.
　一対の第二固定部２６０、２６１のうち一方（つまり、Ｘ方向＋側）の第二固定部２６０は、揺動支持バネ２６ＡにおけるＸ方向＋側の端部に配置されている。このような一方の第二固定部２６０は、第一貫通孔２６ａを有する。 の う ち One of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 (that is, the + side in the X direction) is disposed at the end of the swing support spring 26A on the + side in the X direction. One such second fixing portion 260 has a first through hole 26a.
　一方、他方（つまり、Ｘ方向－側）の第二固定部２６１は、揺動支持バネ２６ＡにおけるＸ方向－側の端部に配置されている。このような他方の第二固定部２６１は、第一貫通孔２６ｂを有する。一対の第二固定部２６０、２６１はそれぞれ、Ｘ方向に延在した一対の接続部２６３、２６４により第一固定部２６２に接続されている。 On the other hand, the second fixing portion 261 on the other side (that is, on the negative side in the X direction) is arranged at the end on the negative side in the X direction of the swing support spring 26A. The other second fixing portion 261 has a first through hole 26b. The pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 are connected to the first fixing portion 262 by a pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 extending in the X direction, respectively.
　揺動支持バネ２６Ａの場合、一対の第二固定部２６０、２６１のＺ方向－側の面は、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０におけるＺ方向＋側の端面に接着固定されている。この状態で、第一貫通孔２６ａ、２６ｂにはそれぞれ、第一側壁部２２０の第一位置決め凸部２２ｃが挿通されている（図６および図８参照）。 In the case of the swing support spring 26A, the surfaces of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 on the negative side in the Z direction are adhesively fixed to the end surfaces of the first side wall 220 of the first base 22 on the positive side in the Z direction. In this state, the first positioning protrusions 22c of the first side wall 220 are inserted into the first through holes 26a and 26b, respectively (see FIGS. 6 and 8).
　一方、揺動支持バネ２６Ｂの場合、一対の第二固定部２６０、２６１のＺ方向－側の面は、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２１におけるＺ方向＋側の端面に接着固定されている。この状態で、第一貫通孔２６ａ、２６ｂにはそれぞれ、第一側壁部２２１の第二位置決め凸部２２ｄが挿通されている（図６および図８参照）。 On the other hand, in the case of the swing support spring 26B, the surfaces of the pair of second fixing portions 260 and 261 on the negative side in the Z direction are bonded and fixed to the end surfaces of the first side wall 221 of the first base 22 on the positive side in the Z direction. I have. In this state, the second positioning projection 22d of the first side wall 221 is inserted into each of the first through holes 26a and 26b (see FIGS. 6 and 8).
　第一固定部２６２は、第二固定部２６０、２６１同士のＸ方向における間部分に、Ｘ方向の隙間を介して設けられている。第一固定部２６２は、一対の第二貫通孔２６ｃを有する。 The first fixing portion 262 is provided at a portion between the second fixing portions 260 and 261 in the X direction via a gap in the X direction. The first fixing portion 262 has a pair of second through holes 26c.
　第一固定部２６２のＺ方向＋側の面は、ホルダ２５の張出し部２５ｄの裏面に形成されたバネ座面２５ｆに接着固定されている。なお、揺動支持バネ２６Ｂの第一固定部２６２のＺ方向＋側の面は、ホルダ２５の張出し部２５ｅの裏面に形成されたバネ座面２５ｇに接着固定されている。 (4) The surface of the first fixing portion 262 on the + side in the Z direction is adhesively fixed to a spring seat surface 25f formed on the back surface of the extension 25d of the holder 25. The surface of the first fixing portion 262 of the swing support spring 26B on the + side in the Z direction is adhesively fixed to a spring seat surface 25g formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25e of the holder 25.
　揺動支持バネ２６Ａの場合、一対の第二貫通孔２６ｃにはそれぞれ、ホルダ２５の張出し部２５ｄの裏面に形成された一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部２５ｈが挿通されている。一方、揺動支持バネ２６Ｂの場合、一対の第二貫通孔２６ｃにはそれぞれ、ホルダ２５の張出し部２５ｅの裏面に形成された一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部２５ｉが挿通されている。 In the case of the swing support spring 26A, a pair of holder-side positioning projections 25h formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25d of the holder 25 are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c, respectively. On the other hand, in the case of the swing support spring 26B, a pair of holder-side positioning projections 25i formed on the back surface of the projecting portion 25e of the holder 25 are inserted into the pair of second through holes 26c, respectively.
　一対の接続部２６３、２６４のうち接続部２６３は、第二固定部２６０と第一固定部２６２とを接続している。一方、一対の接続部２６３、２６４のうち接続部２６４は、第二固定部２６１と第一固定部２６２とを接続している。 の う ち The connecting part 263 of the pair of connecting parts 263 and 264 connects the second fixing part 260 and the first fixing part 262. On the other hand, the connecting portion 264 of the pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 connects the second fixing portion 261 and the first fixing portion 262.
　一対の接続部２６３、２６４はそれぞれ、略Ｓ字状の線状である。一対の接続部２６３、２６４はそれぞれ、第一固定部２６２に近い側の端部（一端部ともいう。）に、Ｙ方向に平行（つまり、第一軸２９Ｌと平行）なストレート部２６ｄ、２６ｅを有する。 Each of the pair of connecting portions 263 and 264 has a substantially S-shaped linear shape. The pair of connecting portions 263, 264 are respectively straight portions 26d, 26e parallel to the Y direction (that is, parallel to the first shaft 29L) at ends (also referred to as one ends) on the side closer to the first fixing portion 262. Having.
　接続部２６３のストレート部２６ｄと接続部２６４のストレート部２６ｅとが、捩じれ許容部２６５を構成している。このような捩じれ許容部２６５は、捩じれることにより、第一固定部２６２の、第二固定部２６０、２６１に対する捩じれを許容する。すなわち、捩じれ許容部２６５が捩じれることにより、ホルダ２５は、第一ベース２２に対して揺動する。ホルダ２５の揺動中心である第一軸２９Ｌは、揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの捩じれ許容部２６５により構成されている。したがって、ホルダ２５は、揺動中心軸を構成として備える必要がない。このように、本実施形態の場合、ホルダ２５が、シンプルに構成されている。 ス ト レ ー ト The straight portion 26d of the connection portion 263 and the straight portion 26e of the connection portion 264 constitute a torsion allowable portion 265. The torsion allowable portion 265 allows the first fixing portion 262 to twist with respect to the second fixing portions 260 and 261 by being twisted. That is, the holder 25 swings with respect to the first base 22 by twisting of the torsion allowance portion 265. The first shaft 29L, which is the center of the swing of the holder 25, is constituted by the torsion allowable portion 265 of the swing support springs 26A, 26B. Therefore, the holder 25 does not need to include the swing center axis as a configuration. Thus, in the case of the present embodiment, the holder 25 is simply configured.
　また、捩じれ許容部２６５は、弾性変形することにより、第二固定部２６０、２６１と第一固定部２６２とのＺ方向の相対変位を許容する。すなわち、捩じれ許容部２６５は、弾性変形することにより、第一ベース２２とホルダ２５とのＺ方向の相対変位を許容する。このような構成により、第一ベース２２からホルダ２５に伝わる衝撃が緩和される。 The torsion allowable portion 265 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the second fixing portions 260 and 261 and the first fixing portion 262 by being elastically deformed. That is, the torsion allowable portion 265 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first base 22 and the holder 25 by elastically deforming. With such a configuration, the impact transmitted from the first base 22 to the holder 25 is reduced.
　なお、図示は省略するが、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの組付状態において、捩じれ許容部２６５には、ゲル状の制振部材が設けられてもよい。当該制振部材は、捩じれ許容部２６５を覆うように設けられてもよい。また、当該制振部材は、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０、２２１の上面に接触していてもよい。さらに、当該制振部材は、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０、２２１の上面、および、ホルダ２５の一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅの下面に接触していてもよい。 省略 す る Although not shown, in the assembled state of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B, the torsion allowable portion 265 may be provided with a gel-like vibration damping member. The vibration damping member may be provided so as to cover the twist allowable portion 265. Further, the vibration damping member may be in contact with the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22. Further, the vibration damping member may be in contact with the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22 and the lower surfaces of the pair of overhangs 25 d and 25 e of the holder 25.
　上記制振部材は、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの共振の抑制に効果的である。共振を抑制する観点から、制振部材は、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂにおいて使用時に最も大きく変形する捩じれ許容部２６５に設けられると好ましい。ただし、制振部材は、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂにおける捩じれ許容部２６５以外の部分に設けられてもよい。 The vibration damping member is effective in suppressing resonance of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. From the viewpoint of suppressing the resonance, it is preferable that the vibration damping member is provided in the torsion permissible portion 265 that deforms most when used in the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. However, the vibration damping member may be provided at a portion other than the torsion allowable portion 265 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B.
　上述の一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの組付状態において、ホルダ２５と第一ベース２２とは、直接接触していない。つまり、上記組付状態において、ホルダ２５と第一ベース２２とは、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂのみを介して接続されている。換言すれば、ホルダ２５と第一ベース２２とは、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂとの接続部を除いて離れている。なお、上記制振部材が、第一ベース２２とホルダ２５とに接触している場合には、第一ベース２２とホルダ２５とは、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂおよび上記制振部材のみを介して接続されている。 ホ ル ダ In the assembled state of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B, the holder 25 and the first base 22 are not in direct contact. That is, in the assembled state, the holder 25 and the first base 22 are connected only via the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. In other words, the holder 25 and the first base 22 are apart from each other except for the connection between the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B. When the damping member is in contact with the first base 22 and the holder 25, the first base 22 and the holder 25 are connected only to the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B and the damping member. Connected through.
　したがって、第一ベース２２の周面と、当該周面と所定方向に対面するホルダ２５の周面との間には、当該所定方向において所定の距離の隙間が存在している。換言すれば、第一ベース２２の周面と、当該周面と所定方向に対面するホルダ２５の周面とは、接触していない。さらに換言すれば、ホルダ２５は、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂにより、第一ベース２２に対して浮くように支持（フローティング支持）されている。 Therefore, there is a gap of a predetermined distance in the predetermined direction between the peripheral surface of the first base 22 and the peripheral surface of the holder 25 facing the peripheral surface in a predetermined direction. In other words, the peripheral surface of the first base 22 does not contact the peripheral surface of the holder 25 facing the peripheral surface in a predetermined direction. In other words, the holder 25 is supported (floating supported) so as to float on the first base 22 by the pair of swinging support springs 26A and 26B.
　具体的には、たとえば、図９に示されるように、第一ベース２２の底壁部２２ａの上面と、低壁部２２ａとＺ方向に対向するホルダ２５の裏面との間には、全面にわたりＺ方向における所定の隙間が存在している。 Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 9, the entire surface is located between the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 22 a of the first base 22 and the back surface of the holder 25 facing the low wall portion 22 a in the Z direction. There is a predetermined gap in the Z direction.
　また、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０の内側面（Ｙ方向－側の側面）と、当該内側面に対向するホルダ２５の対向壁部２５ｂの外側面（Ｙ方向＋側の側面）との間には、全面にわたりＹ方向における所定の隙間が存在している。 Also, the inner side surface (the Y-side surface) of the first side wall 220 of the first base 22 and the outer side surface (the Y-direction side surface) of the opposing wall portion 25b of the holder 25 facing the inner side surface. There is a predetermined gap in the Y direction over the entire surface.
　また、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２１の内側面（Ｙ方向＋側の側面）と、当該内側面に対向するホルダ２５の対向壁部２５ｃの外側面（Ｙ方向－側の側面）との間には、前面にわたりＹ方向における所定の隙間が存在している。 Also, the inner side surface of the first side wall portion 221 of the first base 22 (the + side surface in the Y direction) and the outer side surface of the opposing wall portion 25 c of the holder 25 facing the inner side surface (the − side surface in the Y direction) There is a predetermined gap in the Y direction over the front surface.
　また、第一ベース２２の接続壁部２２２の内側面（Ｘ方向＋側の側面）と、当該内側面と対向するホルダ２５の接続壁部２５ｋの外側面（Ｘ方向－側の側面）との間には、全面にわたりＸ方向における所定の隙間が存在している。 In addition, the inner surface of the connection wall portion 222 of the first base 22 (the + side surface in the X direction) and the outer surface of the connection wall portion 25 k of the holder 25 facing the inner surface (the − side surface in the X direction). There is a predetermined gap in the X direction across the entire surface.
　さらに、第一ベース２２の第一側壁部２２０、２２１の上面（Ｚ方向＋側の面）と、当該上面とＺ方向に対向するホルダ２５の一対の張出し部２５ｄ、２５ｅの下面（Ｚ方向－側の面）との間には、全面にわたりＺ方向の隙間が存在している。 Further, the upper surfaces of the first side walls 220 and 221 of the first base 22 (the surface on the + side in the Z direction) and the lower surfaces of the pair of protrusions 25d and 25e of the holder 25 facing the upper surface in the Z direction (−Z direction). (A side surface), there is a gap in the Z direction over the entire surface.
　このような構成は、たとえば、カメラ搭載装置が落下した場合に、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂが、第一ベース２２からホルダ２５およびプリズム２３に加わる衝撃を緩和する。これにより、カメラ搭載装置が落下した際のホルダ２５の損傷が抑制される。 In such a configuration, for example, when the camera mounting device falls, the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B alleviate the impact applied to the holder 25 and the prism 23 from the first base 22. This suppresses damage to the holder 25 when the camera mounting device falls.
　＜前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ＞
　図６および図９を参照して、前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７（第一アクチュエータともいう。）について説明する。前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７は、第一軸２９Ｌ（図６参照）を中心にホルダ２５を揺動させる。第一軸２９Ｌは、Ｙ方向に平行な軸である。具体的には、第一軸２９Ｌは、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂの第一固定部２６２のＸ方向における中心位置を結んだ直線である。 <Front OIS actuator>
The front OIS actuator 27 (also referred to as a first actuator) will be described with reference to FIGS. The front OIS actuator 27 swings the holder 25 about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6). The first axis 29L is an axis parallel to the Y direction. Specifically, the first shaft 29L is a straight line connecting the center positions in the X direction of the first fixing portions 262 of the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B.
　前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７は、プリズム２３の光路屈曲面２３１およびホルダ２５とＺ方向（つまり、第一光軸の方向）に重なるようにプリズム２３およびホルダ２５の裏側（つまり、Ｚ方向－側）に配置されている。前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７は、第一マグネット２７ａ、第一コイル２７ｃ、および第一ホール素子２７ｅなどを備える。 The front OIS actuator 27 is disposed on the back side (that is, the negative side in the Z direction) of the prism 23 and the holder 25 so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 and the holder 25 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). Have been. The front OIS actuator 27 includes a first magnet 27a, a first coil 27c, a first Hall element 27e, and the like.
　第一マグネット２７ａは、可動側部材であるホルダ２５の裏側面（つまり、Ｚ方向－側の面）に固定されている。具体的には、第一マグネット２７ａは、ホルダ２５の裏面に設けられたマグネット保持部２５ｊに固定されている。 The first magnet 27a is fixed to the rear side surface (that is, the surface on the negative side in the Z direction) of the holder 25, which is a movable member. Specifically, the first magnet 27a is fixed to a magnet holding portion 25j provided on the back surface of the holder 25.
　なお、第一マグネット２７ａは、Ｘ方向に隣り合う２個のマグネット素子からなる。これら各マグネット素子はそれぞれ、Ｚ方向に着磁され、片側に一つの磁極を有する。各マグネット素子の磁極の向きは、互いに反対である。第一マグネット２７ａは、２個のマグネット素子が一体に構成されていてもよい。 The first magnet 27a is composed of two magnet elements adjacent in the X direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction, and has one magnetic pole on one side. The directions of the magnetic poles of each magnet element are opposite to each other. The first magnet 27a may include two magnet elements integrally formed.
　第一コイル２７ｃおよび第一ホール素子２７ｅは、第一ベース２２の裏側面に固定された、フレキシブルプリント回路基板（以下、ＦＰＣ）２８の表面（つまり、Ｚ方向＋側の面）に固定されている。 The first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter, referred to as FPC) 28 fixed to the back surface of the first base 22 (that is, the surface on the + side in the Z direction). I have.
　第一コイル２７ｃおよび第一ホール素子２７ｅは、第一ベース２２のベース側開口部２２ｂに配置されている。なお、第一コイル２７ｃは、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。なお、第一コイル２７ｃは、ＦＰＣ２８の表面に印刷された所謂パターンコイルであってもよい。第一ホール素子２７ｅは、第一コイル２７ｃの径方向の内側に配置されている。 The first coil 27c and the first Hall element 27e are arranged in the base-side opening 22b of the first base 22. The first coil 27c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape. Note that the first coil 27c may be a so-called pattern coil printed on the surface of the FPC 28. The first Hall element 27e is arranged inside the first coil 27c in the radial direction.
　以上のような構成を有する前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ２７は、制御部５（図２１参照）の制御下で、第一軸２９Ｌ（図６参照）を中心にホルダ２５を揺動させる。 The front OIS actuator 27 having the above configuration swings the holder 25 about the first shaft 29L (see FIG. 6) under the control of the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21).
　次に、図２および図１３Ａ～図２８を参照してレンズモジュール３について説明する。 Next, the lens module 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIGS. 13A to 28.
　＜レンズモジュール＞
　レンズモジュール３は、第二カバー３１、第二ベース３２、レンズ部３３、ＡＦ装置３４、および第二振れ補正装置３５を備える。なお、図１３Ａ～図２８に示されるレンズモジュール３は、たとえば、図２に示されるレンズモジュール３と、ＦＰＣの端子（後述の第一ターミナル部３４ｄ１など）の第二ベース３２に対する突出方向が異なる。ただし、図１３Ａ～図２８に示されるレンズモジュール３におけるその他の部分の構造は、図２に示されるレンズモジュール３とほぼ同様であるため、同一符号が付されている。 <Lens module>
The lens module 3 includes a second cover 31, a second base 32, a lens unit 33, an AF device 34, and a second shake correction device 35. Note that the lens module 3 shown in FIGS. 13A to 28 differs from, for example, the lens module 3 shown in FIG. 2 in the direction in which the terminals (such as a first terminal portion 34d1 described later) of the FPC project from the second base 32. . However, the structure of the other parts in the lens module 3 shown in FIGS. 13A to 28 is substantially the same as that of the lens module 3 shown in FIG.
　＜第二カバー＞
　図２、図１３Ａおよび図１３Ｂを参照して第二カバー３１について説明する。第二カバー３１は、たとえば合成樹脂製または非磁性金属製であり、Ｘ方向両側およびＺ方向－側（つまり、裏側）が開口した箱状である。 <Second cover>
The second cover 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 13A and 13B. The second cover 31 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a non-magnetic metal, and has a box shape that is open on both sides in the X direction and on the − side (that is, the back side) in the Z direction.
　具体的には、第二カバー３１は、天板部３１ａ、前板部３１ｂ、後板部３１ｃ、第一側板部３１ｄ、および第二側板部３１ｅを有する。 Specifically, the second cover 31 has a top plate portion 31a, a front plate portion 31b, a rear plate portion 31c, a first side plate portion 31d, and a second side plate portion 31e.
　天板部３１ａは、矩形状の板部材である。このような天板部３１ａは、第二カバー３１におけるＺ方向＋側に配置される。天板部３１ａは、Ｘ方向における一端部（プリズムモジュール２（図２参照）側の端部であって、Ｘ方向－側の端部）に切欠部３１ｆを有する。 The top plate portion 31a is a rectangular plate member. Such a top plate portion 31a is disposed on the + side in the Z direction of the second cover 31. The top plate portion 31a has a notch 31f at one end in the X direction (an end on the prism module 2 (see FIG. 2) side and an end on the negative side in the X direction).
　切欠部３１ｆは、天板部３１ａのＸ方向－側の端部から、Ｘ方向＋側に向かって切り欠かれている。このような切欠部３１ｆは、平面視で、Ｙ方向に長い矩形状である。このような切欠部３１ｆには、後述の接続部材３４３ｄが配置されている。 The notch 31f is cut out from the minus end in the X direction of the top plate portion 31a toward the plus side in the X direction. Such a notch 31f has a rectangular shape long in the Y direction in plan view. A connection member 343d described later is arranged in such a notch 31f.
　前板部３１ｂは、矩形の板部材であって、天板部３１ａのＸ方向－側の端部から、Ｚ方向－側に延在している。前板部３１ｂは、中央部を含む部分に、前側開口部３１ｇを有する。前側開口部３１ｇは、レンズ部３３のＸ方向－側の端面が、Ｘ方向－側に露出可能な大きさを有する。プリズムモジュール２からの光は、前側開口部３１ｇを通過してレンズ部３３に入光する。 The front plate portion 31b is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the X-direction end of the top plate portion 31a to the Z-direction side. The front plate portion 31b has a front opening portion 31g in a portion including the central portion. The front opening 31g has a size such that the end surface on the −X direction side of the lens unit 33 can be exposed on the −X direction side. Light from the prism module 2 passes through the front opening 31g and enters the lens unit 33.
　また、前側開口部３１ｇは、天板部３１ａの切欠部３１ｆと連続している。したがって、前側開口部３１ｇのＺ方向＋側の縁部は、天板部３１ａと前板部３１ｂとにより形成される角部３１ｈに存在しない。このような構成は、前側開口部３１ｇの加工を容易にすることができる。 Further, the front opening 31g is continuous with the notch 31f of the top plate 31a. Therefore, the edge of the front opening 31g on the + side in the Z direction does not exist in the corner 31h formed by the top plate 31a and the front plate 31b. Such a configuration can facilitate the processing of the front opening 31g.
　後板部３１ｃは、矩形の板部材であって、天板部３１ａのＸ方向＋側の端部から、Ｚ方向－側に延在している。後板部３１ｃは、中央部を含む部分に、後側開口部３１ｉを有する。後側開口部３１ｉは、レンズ部３３のＸ方向＋側の端面が、Ｘ方向＋側に露出可能な大きさを有する。レンズ部３３からの光は、後側開口部３１ｉを通過して撮像素子モジュール４に入光する。 The rear plate portion 31c is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the end of the top plate portion 31a on the plus side in the X direction to the minus side in the Z direction. The rear plate portion 31c has a rear opening 31i in a portion including the central portion. The rear opening 31i has a size such that the end surface of the lens unit 33 on the + side in the X direction can be exposed on the + side in the X direction. The light from the lens unit 33 passes through the rear opening 31i and enters the image sensor module 4.
　第一側板部３１ｄは、矩形の板部材であって、天板部３１ａのＹ方向＋側の端部から、Ｚ方向－側に延在している。また、第二側板部３１ｅは、矩形の板部材であって、天板部３１ａのＹ方向－側の端部から、Ｚ方向－側に延在している。以上のような第二カバー３１は、後述の第二ベース３２にＺ方向＋側から組み合わされている。 The first side plate portion 31d is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the end of the top plate portion 31a on the plus side in the Y direction to the minus side in the Z direction. The second side plate portion 31e is a rectangular plate member, and extends from the Y-direction end of the top plate portion 31a to the Z-direction side. The second cover 31 as described above is combined with a second base 32 described later from the + side in the Z direction.
　＜第二ベース＞
　図１３Ｃ、図１４、および図２２～図２６を参照して第二ベース３２について説明する。第二ベース３２は、上述の第二カバー３１と組み合わされることにより、レンズ部３３、ＡＦ装置３４、および第二振れ補正装置３５を配置可能な第二収容空間３２ｃ（図２参照）を形成する。 <Second base>
The second base 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C, 14, and 22 to 26. The second base 32 is combined with the above-described second cover 31 to form a second accommodation space 32c (see FIG. 2) in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 34, and the second shake correction device 35 can be arranged. .
　第二ベース３２は、下側ベース要素３２ａと上側ベース要素３２ｂとが組み合わされて構成されている。 The second base 32 is configured by combining a lower base element 32a and an upper base element 32b.
　第二ベース３２は、底面部３２ｄおよび一対の第二側壁部３２ｇ、３２ｈを有する。底面部３２ｄは、合成樹脂製の基部と、当該基部にインサート成形された金属製の補強プレート３２ｋとを有する。このような補強プレート３２ｋは、底面部３２ｄの高剛性化および薄肉化に寄与する。 The second base 32 has a bottom surface portion 32d and a pair of second side wall portions 32g, 32h. The bottom surface 32d has a base made of a synthetic resin, and a metal reinforcing plate 32k insert-molded on the base. Such a reinforcing plate 32k contributes to increasing the rigidity and reducing the thickness of the bottom surface portion 32d.
　第二ベース３２の補強プレート３２ｋは、後述のレンズガイド３４１よりもＺ方向－側に、レンズガイド３４１に対して重なるように配置されている。具体的にはレンズガイド３４１がオートフォーカスの動作の際に移動可能な範囲（つまり、Ｘ方向に移動可能な範囲）および振れ補正の動作の際に移動可能な範囲（つまり、Ｙ方向に移動可能な範囲）の何れの位置に存在する場合でも、補強プレート３２ｋのＺ方向＋側に、レンズガイド３４１が存在する。このため、補強プレート３２ｋの表面（つまり、Ｚ方向＋側の面）は、常にレンズガイド３４１により覆われて露出しない。これにより、補強プレート３２ｋによる反射光が、レンズ部３３、ひいては後述の撮像素子モジュール４の撮像素子に入光しないようにしている。 (4) The reinforcing plate 32k of the second base 32 is disposed on the minus side in the Z direction from a lens guide 341 described later so as to overlap the lens guide 341. Specifically, the range in which the lens guide 341 can move during the autofocus operation (that is, the range in which the lens guide 341 can move in the X direction) and the range in which the lens guide 341 can move during the shake correction operation (that is, the range that can move in the Y direction) In any case, the lens guide 341 exists on the + side in the Z direction of the reinforcing plate 32k. Therefore, the surface of the reinforcing plate 32k (that is, the surface on the + side in the Z direction) is always covered with the lens guide 341 and is not exposed. Thus, the light reflected by the reinforcing plate 32k is prevented from entering the lens unit 33 and eventually the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 described later.
　第二ベース３２は、底面部３２ｄにおける補強プレート３２ｋのＹ方向両側部分に、それぞれ底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆ（図２２および図２３参照）を有する。図２５および図２６に示されるように、底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆにはそれぞれ、後述のＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂが配置されている。 The second base 32 has bottom through holes 32e and 32f (see FIGS. 22 and 23) on both sides in the Y direction of the reinforcing plate 32k on the bottom surface 32d. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a first AF coil 346b and a second AF coil 347b of an AF actuator 345 described later are arranged in the bottom through holes 32e and 32f, respectively.
　第二側壁部３２ｇ、３２ｈはそれぞれ、底面部３２ｄのＹ方向両端部からＺ方向＋側に延在している。本実施形態の場合、第二側壁部３２ｇは、図２４に示されるように、下側ベース要素３２ａの第二下壁要素３２ａ１と、上側ベース要素３２ｂの第二上壁要素３２ｂ１とが組み合わされて構成されている。また、第二側壁部３２ｈは、下側ベース要素３２ａの第二下壁要素３２ａ２と、上側ベース要素３２ｂの第二上壁要素３２ｂ２とが組み合わされて構成されている。 The second side walls 32g and 32h extend from both ends in the Y direction of the bottom surface 32d to the + side in the Z direction. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the second side wall 32g is formed by combining the second lower wall element 32a1 of the lower base element 32a and the second upper wall element 32b1 of the upper base element 32b. It is configured. Further, the second side wall portion 32h is configured by combining a second lower wall element 32a2 of the lower base element 32a and a second upper wall element 32b2 of the upper base element 32b.
　図２５および図２６に示されるように、第二側壁部３２ｇ、３２ｈはそれぞれ、コイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊを有する。このようなコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊにはそれぞれ、後述の第二振れ補正装置３５の第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂが載置されている。本実施形態の場合、コイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊは、上側ベース要素３２ｂの第二上壁要素３２ｂ１、３２ｂ２の上面に設けられている。 第二 As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the second side wall portions 32g and 32h have coil mounting portions 32i and 32j, respectively. A first OIS coil 352b and a second OIS coil 353b of a second shake correction device 35 described later are mounted on such coil mounting portions 32i and 32j, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j are provided on the upper surfaces of the second upper wall elements 32b1, 32b2 of the upper base element 32b.
　コイル載置部３２ｉは、Ｚ方向において、レンズガイド３４１の第一張出部３４ａ１と第二張出部３４ａ３との間に配置されている。また、コイル載置部３２ｊは、Ｚ方向において、レンズガイド３４１の第一張出部３４ａ２と第二張出部３４ａ４との間に配置されている。 The coil mounting portion 32i is disposed between the first overhang portion 34a1 and the second overhang portion 34a3 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction. The coil mounting portion 32j is disposed between the first overhang portion 34a2 and the second overhang portion 34a4 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction.
　また、図２５に示されるように、コイル載置部３２ｉと底面部３２ｄとの間には、後述のＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａが配置されている。また、図２６に示されるように、コイル載置部３２ｊと底面部３２ｄとの間には、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａが配置されている。第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａは、後述のレンズガイド３４１に保持されている。 As shown in FIG. 25, a first AF magnet 346a of an AF actuator 345 described below is disposed between the coil mounting portion 32i and the bottom surface 32d. Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a second AF magnet 347a of the AF actuator 345 is disposed between the coil mounting portion 32j and the bottom surface portion 32d. The first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are held by a lens guide 341 described later.
　本実施形態の場合、底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆとコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊとがＺ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。したがって、底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆに配置されている第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂと、コイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊに載置されている第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂとが、Ｚ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。 In the case of the present embodiment, the bottom surface through holes 32e and 32f and the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j overlap with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Therefore, the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b disposed in the bottom through holes 32e and 32f, and the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b mounted on the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j. Overlap at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
　また、第二側壁部３２ｇは、Ｙ方向＋側の側面におけるＸ方向両端部に、後述のスプリング３４２ａ１、３４２ａ３を配置するためのスプリング配置部３２ｍ１、３２ｍ３（図１３Ｃ参照）を有する。一方、第二側壁部３２ｈは、Ｙ方向－側の側面におけるＸ方向両端部に、後述するスプリング３４２ａ２、３４２ａ４を配置するためのスプリング配置部３２ｍ２、３２ｍ４（図１４参照）を有する。 第二 Furthermore, the second side wall portion 32g has spring arranging portions 32m1 and 32m3 (see FIG. 13C) for arranging springs 342a1 and 342a3 to be described later at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the + Y side. On the other hand, the second side wall portion 32h has spring disposing portions 32m2 and 32m4 (see FIG. 14) for disposing springs 342a2 and 342a4 described later on both ends in the X direction on the negative side surface in the Y direction.
　また、第二ベース３２は、Ｘ方向＋側端部に、基準部３２ｎを有する。基準部３２ｎは、第二ベース３２のＸ方向＋側の端部に設けられた板部材である。このような基準部３２ｎのＸ方向＋側の側面は、後述する撮像素子モジュール４のＸ方向の基準面となる。一方、基準部３２ｎは、Ｘ方向－側の側面に、後述するレンズガイド３４１のＸ方向の基準面となる第一基準面３２ｎ１（図２３参照）を有する。このような第一基準面３２ｎ１は、後述のキャリブレーションの際の基準でもある。基準部３２ｎは、中央部に、レンズ部３３を通過した光を撮像素子モジュール４に導光する貫通孔を有する。このような基準部３２ｎは、撮像素子モジュール４を位置決めするための部材である。 第二 The second base 32 has a reference portion 32n at the end in the X direction + side. The reference portion 32n is a plate member provided at an end of the second base 32 on the + side in the X direction. Such a side surface of the reference portion 32n on the + side in the X direction is a reference surface in the X direction of the image sensor module 4 described later. On the other hand, the reference portion 32n has a first reference surface 32n1 (see FIG. 23), which is a reference surface in the X direction of a lens guide 341 to be described later, on the negative side surface in the X direction. Such a first reference plane 32n1 is also a reference for the later-described calibration. The reference portion 32n has a through hole at the center thereof for guiding the light passing through the lens portion 33 to the image sensor module 4. Such a reference portion 32n is a member for positioning the image sensor module 4.
　＜レンズ部＞
　レンズ部３３は、後述のレンズガイド３４１に保持された状態で、第二収容空間３２ｃ（図２参照）に配置されている。このようなレンズ部３３は、筒状のレンズバレル、および、レンズバレルに保持された１以上のレンズを有する。一例として、レンズ部３３は、レンズバレルのＸ方向－側の端部とレンズバレルのＸ方向＋側の端部との間に固定された、たとえば光学３倍以上の望遠レンズ群を有する。なお、レンズ部３３の構造は、上述の構造に限定されない。 <Lens part>
The lens portion 33 is disposed in the second housing space 32c (see FIG. 2) while being held by a lens guide 341 described later. Such a lens unit 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held by the lens barrel. As an example, the lens unit 33 has a telephoto lens group, for example, three times or more optically fixed between an end on the negative side in the X direction of the lens barrel and an end on the positive side in the X direction of the lens barrel. Note that the structure of the lens unit 33 is not limited to the above-described structure.
　＜ＡＦ装置＞
　図１３Ｃ～図２１を参照して、ＡＦ装置３４について説明する。ＡＦ装置３４は、駆動部であって、オートフォーカスを目的として、レンズ部３３をＸ方向に変位させる。具体的には、ＡＦ装置３４は、レンズガイド３４１、第一支持機構３４２、第二支持機構３４３、ＦＰＣ３４４、およびＡＦアクチュエータ３４５を有する。 <AF device>
The AF device 34 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C to 21. The AF device 34 is a driving unit, and displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus. Specifically, the AF device 34 includes a lens guide 341, a first support mechanism 342, a second support mechanism 343, an FPC 344, and an AF actuator 345.
　＜レンズガイド＞
　図１５～図１７を参照して、レンズガイド３４１について説明する。図１５は、一部の部材を省略した状態のレンズモジュール３を、Ｙ方向＋側から見た図である。図１６は、一部の部材を省略した状態のレンズモジュール３を、Ｙ方向－側から見た図である。図１７は、第二ベース３２を省略した状態のレンズモジュール３を、Ｘ方向－側から見た図である。 <Lens guide>
The lens guide 341 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where some members are omitted, as viewed from the + side in the Y direction. FIG. 16 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where some members are omitted, as viewed from the − side in the Y direction. FIG. 17 is a view of the lens module 3 in a state where the second base 32 is omitted, as viewed from the negative side in the X direction.
　レンズガイド３４１は、筒状のレンズ保持部３４１ａ、一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２、および一対の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４を有する。このようなレンズガイド３４１は、Ｘ方向（つまり、第二光軸の方向）およびＹ方向の変位を可能な状態で、第二収容空間３２ｃに配置されている。 The lens guide 341 has a cylindrical lens holding portion 341a, a pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2, and a pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4. Such a lens guide 341 is arranged in the second accommodation space 32c in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
　レンズ保持部３４１ａは、レンズバレルを保持可能な収容空間を有する。 The lens holding portion 341a has a housing space that can hold the lens barrel.
　一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２はそれぞれ、筒状のレンズ保持部３４１ａの外周面の２箇所から、Ｙ方向において互いに反対方向に延在した状態で設けられている。 A pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2 are provided so as to extend from two locations on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lens holding portion 341a in directions opposite to each other in the Y direction.
　一対の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４はそれぞれ、筒状のレンズ保持部３４１ａの外周面のうち、一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２よりもＺ方向＋側の２箇所から、Ｙ方向において互いに反対方向に延在した状態で設けられている。 The pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 are respectively provided in the Y direction from two locations on the + Z direction side of the pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2 on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lens holding portion 341a. They are provided so as to extend in opposite directions.
　一方（Ｙ方向＋側）の第一張出部３４ａ１と一方（Ｙ方向＋側）の第二張出部３４ａ３とは、Ｚ方向において空間３４ｂ１を介して重なっている。他方（Ｙ方向－側）の第一張出部３４ａ２と他方（Ｙ方向－側）の第二張出部３４ａ４とは、Ｚ方向において空間３４ｂ２を介して重なっている。 One (Y direction + side) of the first overhang 34a1 and one (Y direction + side) of the second overhang 34a3 overlap in the Z direction via a space 34b1. The other (Y-direction side) first overhang portion 34a2 and the other (Y-direction side) second overhang portion 34a4 overlap with each other via the space 34b2 in the Z direction.
　レンズガイド３４１は、後述するＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａを保持する第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５（図１５参照）、および、第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａを保持する第一マグネット保持部３４ａ６（図１６参照）を有する。具体的には、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６はそれぞれ、一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２に設けられている。 The lens guide 341 includes a first magnet holding portion 34a5 (see FIG. 15) for holding a first AF magnet 346a of an AF actuator 345 described later, and a first magnet holding portion 34a6 (FIG. 16) for holding a second AF magnet 347a. Reference). Specifically, the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are provided on the pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2, respectively.
　第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６はそれぞれ、Ｚ方向－側が開口した凹部である。このような第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６はそれぞれ、第二ベース３２の一対のコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊ（図２５および図２６参照）のＺ方向－側に配置されている。また、このような一対の第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６と第二ベース３２の底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆとは、Ｚ方向に平行な同一直線上に設けられている。一対の第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６は、底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆよりもＺ方向＋側に設けられている。 {Circle around (1)} The first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are concave portions opened on the negative side in the Z direction. Such first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are respectively arranged on the negative side in the Z direction of the pair of coil mounting portions 32i and 32j of the second base 32 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). The pair of first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 and the bottom through holes 32e, 32f of the second base 32 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction. The pair of first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 are provided on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the bottom surface through holes 32e and 32f.
　レンズガイド３４１は、後述する後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１の第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａを保持する第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７（図１５参照）を有する。また、レンズガイド３４１は、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１の第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａを保持する第二マグネット保持部３４ａ８（図１６参照）を有する。具体的には、第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７、３４ａ８はそれぞれ、一対の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４に設けられている。 The lens guide 341 has a second magnet holding portion 34a7 (see FIG. 15) for holding a first OIS magnet 352a of a rear OIS actuator 351 described later. The lens guide 341 has a second magnet holding portion 34a8 (see FIG. 16) for holding the second OIS magnet 353a of the rear OIS actuator 351. Specifically, the second magnet holding portions 34a7 and 34a8 are provided on the pair of second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4, respectively.
　一対の第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７、３４ａ８はそれぞれ、Ｚ方向－側が開口した凹部である。このような一対の第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７、３４ａ８と、第二ベース３２のコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊとは、Ｚ方向に平行な同一直線上に設けられている。一対の第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７、３４ａ８は、コイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊよりもＺ方向＋側に設けられている。 The pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7 and 34a8 are concave portions opened on the negative side in the Z direction. The pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7, 34a8 and the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j of the second base 32 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction. The pair of second magnet holding portions 34a7, 34a8 are provided on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the coil mounting portions 32i, 32j.
　レンズガイド３４１は、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５の近傍に、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４６ｄを保持する第三マグネット保持部３４ｂ３（図１５参照）を有する。また、レンズガイド３４１は、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ６の近傍に、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４７ｄを保持する第三マグネット保持部３４ｂ４（図１６参照）を有する。 The lens guide 341 has a third magnet holder 34b3 (see FIG. 15) near the first magnet holder 34a5 for holding the first X position detection magnet 346d of the AF actuator 345. In addition, the lens guide 341 has a third magnet holder 34b4 (see FIG. 16) that holds the second X position detection magnet 347d of the AF actuator 345 near the first magnet holder 34a6.
　具体的には、第三マグネット保持部３４ｂ３、３４ｂ４はそれぞれ、一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２のうち、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６よりもＸ方向－側に設けられている。なお、第三マグネット保持部３４ｂ３、３４ｂ４の位置は、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６の近傍であれば、上述の位置に限定されない。 Specifically, the third magnet holding portions 34b3, 34b4 are respectively provided on the −X direction side of the first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 of the pair of first overhang portions 34a1, 34a2. Note that the positions of the third magnet holding units 34b3 and 34b4 are not limited to the above positions as long as they are near the first magnet holding units 34a5 and 34a6.
　レンズガイド３４１は、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６の近傍に、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１のＹ位置検出マグネット３５２ｃ、３５３ｃを保持する一対の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ５、３４ｂ６（図１５および図１６参照）を有する。 The lens guide 341 includes a pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) that hold the Y position detection magnets 352c and 353c of the rear OIS actuator 351 near the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6. ).
　具体的には、一対の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ５、３４ｂ６はそれぞれ、一対の第一張出部３４ａ１、３４ａ２のうち、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６よりもＸ方向＋側に設けられている。なお、一対の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ５、３４ｂ６の位置は、第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６の近傍であれば、上述の位置に限定されない。 Specifically, the pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 are respectively provided on the X direction + side of the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 among the pair of first overhang portions 34a1 and 34a2. . The positions of the pair of fourth magnet holding portions 34b5 and 34b6 are not limited to the above-described positions as long as they are near the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6.
　レンズガイド３４１は、後述する第二支持機構３４３の複数の玉３４３ｅを保持する複数（本実施形態の場合、６個）の玉保持部３４３ａ（図１４参照）を有する。具体的には、これら各玉保持部３４３ａは、一対の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４のＺ方向＋側の面に、３個ずつ設けられている。 The lens guide 341 has a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) ball holding portions 343a (see FIG. 14) for holding a plurality of balls 343e of a second support mechanism 343 described later. Specifically, three of these ball holding portions 343a are provided on the surface of the pair of second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 on the + side in the Z direction.
　レンズガイド３４１は、Ｘ方向＋側に最も変位した状態で、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向＋側の端面（以下、「レンズガイド側基準面」という。）が、基準部３２ｎの第一基準面３２ｎ１に当接する。 When the lens guide 341 is most displaced in the + X direction, the end surface of the lens guide 341 in the + X direction (hereinafter, referred to as “lens guide-side reference surface”) is the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n. Abut.
　レンズガイド３４１のレンズガイド側基準面と、第一基準面３２ｎ１とはそれぞれ、ＹＺ平面に平行な平坦面である。したがって、レンズガイド３４１のレンズガイド側基準面と第一基準面３２ｎ１とが当接（面接触）した状態において、レンズガイド３４１は、Ｘ方向（つまり、第二光軸の方向）に対してＹ方向およびＺ方向に傾斜しない状態（以下、「レンズガイド３４１の基準状態」という。）となる。 レ ン ズ The lens guide-side reference surface of the lens guide 341 and the first reference surface 32n1 are flat surfaces parallel to the YZ plane. Therefore, in a state in which the lens guide-side reference surface of the lens guide 341 and the first reference surface 32n1 are in contact with each other (surface contact), the lens guide 341 moves Y in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis). The lens guide 341 is not inclined in the direction and the Z direction (hereinafter, referred to as “the reference state of the lens guide 341”).
　＜第一支持機構＞
　図１３Ｃ～図１６、および図１８を参照して、第一支持機構３４２について説明する。第一支持機構３４２は、レンズガイド３４１を第二ベース３２に、第二ベース３２に対する変位を可能な状態で弾性的に支持している。このような第一支持機構３４２は、弾性支持機構とも称される。 <First support mechanism>
The first support mechanism 342 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13C to 16 and FIG. The first support mechanism 342 elastically supports the lens guide 341 on the second base 32 so as to be displaceable with respect to the second base 32. Such a first support mechanism 342 is also called an elastic support mechanism.
　第一支持機構３４２は、それぞれが弾性支持部材である複数個（本実施形態の場合４個）のスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４を有する。スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４は、レンズガイド３４１を第二ベース３２に弾性的に支持している。この状態で、レンズ部３３は、第二ベース３２に対してＸ方向およびＹ方向に変位できる。また、レンズガイド３４１は、第二ベース３２に対するＺ方向への変位を、第一支持機構３４２により所定範囲に規制されている。所定範囲とは、スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４の弾性変形に基づいてレンズガイド３４１が変位可能な範囲である。 The first support mechanism 342 has a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) springs 342a1 to 342a4, each of which is an elastic support member. The springs 342a1 to 342a4 elastically support the lens guide 341 on the second base 32. In this state, the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32. The displacement of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is restricted to a predetermined range by the first support mechanism 342. The predetermined range is a range in which the lens guide 341 can be displaced based on the elastic deformation of the springs 342a1 to 342a4.
　スプリング３４２ａ１は、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向＋側かつＹ方向＋側の端部を第二ベース３２に支持している（図１３Ｃ参照）。スプリング３４２ａ２は、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向＋側かつＹ方向－側の端部を第二ベース３２に支持している（図１４参照）。スプリング３４２ａ３は、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向－側かつＹ方向＋側の端部を第二ベース３２に支持している（図１３Ｃ参照）。さらに、スプリング３４２ａ４は、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向－側かつＹ方向－側の端部を第二ベース３２に支持している（図１４参照）。 The spring 342a1 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the + side in the X direction and on the + side in the Y direction on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13C). The spring 342a2 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the X direction + side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 14). The spring 342a3 supports an end of the lens guide 341 on the negative side in the X direction and on the positive side in the Y direction on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13C). Further, the spring 342a4 supports the end of the lens guide 341 on the X direction-side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 14).
　スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４はそれぞれ、図１８に示すように、第一固定部３４２ｂ、第二固定部３４２ｃ、および接続部３４２ｄを有する。なお、図１８は、組付状態における配置のままのスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４を示す。 As shown in FIG. 18, each of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 has a first fixing portion 342b, a second fixing portion 342c, and a connection portion 342d. FIG. 18 shows the springs 342a1 to 342a4 as they are arranged in the assembled state.
　第一固定部３４２ｂは、可動側部材であるレンズガイド３４１に固定されている。第二固定部３４２ｃは、固定側部材である第二ベース３２に固定されている。 The first fixing portion 342b is fixed to a lens guide 341 which is a movable member. The second fixing portion 342c is fixed to the second base 32, which is a fixed member.
　接続部３４２ｄは、第一固定部３４２ｂと第二固定部３４２ｃとを接続している。接続部３４２ｄは、たとえば、少なくとも一部が湾曲した（具体的には、蛇行状に曲げ成形された）線状部材からなる。 The connecting portion 342d connects the first fixing portion 342b and the second fixing portion 342c. The connection portion 342d is made of, for example, a linear member that is at least partially curved (specifically, bent in a meandering shape).
　具体的には、接続部３４２ｄはそれぞれ、Ｚ方向＋側から順に、第一曲げ部３４２ｅと第二曲げ部３４２ｆとを有する。このようなスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４はそれぞれ、第二ベース３２のスプリング配置部３２ｍ１～３２ｍ４（図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）に配置されている。 Specifically, each of the connection portions 342d includes a first bent portion 342e and a second bent portion 342f in order from the + side in the Z direction. Such springs 342a1 to 342a4 are arranged on the spring arrangement portions 32m1 to 32m4 (see FIGS. 13C and 14) of the second base 32, respectively.
　第一曲げ部３４２ｅは、蛇行状に折り曲げられた部分であり、接続部３４２ｄにおける一端部（Ｚ方向＋側の端部）に設けられている。このような第一曲げ部３４２ｅは、第二ベース３２に対してレンズ部３３がＺ方向に変位する際、接続部３４２ｄの長さ方向（Ｚ方向）に弾性変形する。 The first bent portion 342e is a portion bent in a meandering shape, and is provided at one end (the end in the + Z direction) of the connecting portion 342d. When the lens portion 33 is displaced in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32, the first bent portion 342e is elastically deformed in the length direction (Z direction) of the connection portion 342d.
　なお、第一曲げ部３４２ｅの位置は、本実施形態の位置に限定されない。第一曲げ部３４２ｅは、接続部３４２ｄの一方側の半部（つまり、第一固定部３４２ｂ側の半部）に設けられると好ましい。また、第一曲げ部３４２ｅは、本実施形態のように、接続部３４２ｄの一端部に設けられると、より好ましい。図示は省略するが、組付状態において、第一曲げ部３４２ｅはそれぞれ、ゲル状の制振部材に覆われてもよい。 Note that the position of the first bent portion 342e is not limited to the position of the present embodiment. The first bent portion 342e is preferably provided in a half portion on one side of the connection portion 342d (that is, a half portion on the first fixed portion 342b side). Further, it is more preferable that the first bent portion 342e is provided at one end of the connection portion 342d as in the present embodiment. Although not shown, in the assembled state, each of the first bent portions 342e may be covered with a gel-like vibration damping member.
　第二曲げ部３４２ｆは、接続部３４２ｄにおける他端部（Ｚ方向－側の端部）に設けられ、蛇行状に折り曲げられた線状部材である。第二曲げ部３４２ｆは、第二ベース３２に対してレンズ部３３がＺ方向に変位する際、接続部３４２ｄの長さ方向（Ｚ方向）に弾性変形する。第二ベース３２に対してレンズ部３３がＺ方向に変位する際の第二曲げ部３４２ｆの変位量は、第一曲げ部３４２ｅの変位量よりも小さい。 The second bent portion 342f is a linear member that is provided at the other end (the end on the negative side in the Z direction) of the connecting portion 342d and is bent in a meandering shape. When the lens part 33 is displaced in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32, the second bent part 342f is elastically deformed in the length direction (Z direction) of the connection part 342d. The displacement of the second bent portion 342f when the lens portion 33 is displaced in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is smaller than the displacement of the first bent portion 342e.
　また、第二ベース３２に対してレンズ部３３がＸ方向に変位する際、接続部３４２ｄは、第二固定部３４２ｃ側の端部近傍を支点に揺動するように変位する。したがって、接続部３４２ｄにおいて当該支点から遠い（換言すれば、第一固定部３４２ｂに近い）部分ほど、第二ベース３２に対してレンズ部３３がＸ方向に変位する際の変位量が大きい。 When the lens portion 33 is displaced in the X direction with respect to the second base 32, the connection portion 342d is displaced so as to swing around the end near the second fixed portion 342c. Accordingly, the farther from the fulcrum (in other words, the closer to the first fixing portion 342b) the connecting portion 342d, the larger the displacement amount when the lens portion 33 is displaced in the X direction with respect to the second base 32.
　なお、第二曲げ部３４２ｆの位置は、本実施形態の位置に限定されない。第二曲げ部３４２ｆは、接続部３４２ｄの他方側の半部（つまり、第二固定部３４２ｃ側の半部）に設けられると好ましい。また、第二曲げ部３４２ｆは、本実施形態のように、接続部３４２ｄの他端部に設けられると、より好ましい。また、本実施形態において、第二曲げ部３４２ｆは、省略されてもよい。すなわち、接続部３４２ｄは、一箇所にのみ曲げ部を有する構成でもよい。なお、図示は省略するが、第二曲げ部３４２ｆはそれぞれ、ゲル状の制振部材に覆われてもよい。 Note that the position of the second bent portion 342f is not limited to the position of the present embodiment. The second bent portion 342f is preferably provided in a half portion on the other side of the connection portion 342d (that is, a half portion on the second fixed portion 342c side). Further, it is more preferable that the second bent portion 342f is provided at the other end of the connection portion 342d as in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second bent portion 342f may be omitted. That is, the connecting portion 342d may have a configuration having a bent portion only at one place. Although not shown, each of the second bent portions 342f may be covered with a gel-like vibration damping member.
　本実施形態の場合、接続部３４２ｄは、Ｘ方向において方向性を有する。スプリング３４２ａ１とスプリング３４２ａ２とは、Ｘ方向において同方向となるように配置されている。換言すれば、スプリング３４２ａ１とスプリング３４２ａ２とは、たとえば、Ｙ方向＋側から見た場合に、少なくとも接続部３４２ｄが重なるように配置されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, the connection portion 342d has directionality in the X direction. The spring 342a1 and the spring 342a2 are arranged so as to be in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 342a1 and the spring 342a2 are arranged such that at least the connection portions 342d overlap when viewed from the + side in the Y direction, for example.
　スプリング３４２ａ３とスプリング３４２ａ４とは、Ｘ方向において同方向となるように配置される。換言すれば、スプリング３４２ａ３とスプリング３４２ａ４とは、たとえば、Ｙ方向＋側から見た場合に、少なくとも接続部３４２ｄが重なるように配置されている。 The spring 342a3 and the spring 342a4 are arranged so as to be in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 342a3 and the spring 342a4 are arranged such that at least the connection portion 342d overlaps when viewed from the + side in the Y direction, for example.
　スプリング３４２ａ１とスプリング３４２ａ３とは、Ｘ方向において、接続部３４２ｄが同方向を向くように配置されている。スプリング３４２ａ２とスプリング３４２ａ４とは、Ｘ方向において、接続部３４２ｄが同方向を向くように配置されている。 The spring 342a1 and the spring 342a3 are arranged such that the connection portion 342d faces in the same direction in the X direction. The spring 342a2 and the spring 342a4 are arranged so that the connecting portion 342d faces in the same direction in the X direction.
　また、本実施形態の場合、図１８に示すように、たとえば、Ｚ方向＋側から見てレンズガイド３４１の対角位置に配置されたスプリング３４２ａ１の中心とスプリング３４２ａ４の中心とを結んだ直線をＬ１とし、スプリング３４２ａ２の中心とスプリング３４２ａ３の中心とを結んだ直線をＬ２とした場合に、直線Ｌ１と直線Ｌ２との交点（分散配置の中心位置ともいう。）が、後述する基準位置における可動側部材の重心Ｇと一致またはほぼ一致している。 In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, for example, a straight line connecting the center of the spring 342a1 and the center of the spring 342a4 arranged at a diagonal position of the lens guide 341 when viewed from the + side in the Z direction. and L 1, in the case where a straight line connecting the centers of the spring 342a3 spring 342a2 was set to L 2, (also referred to as a center position of the distributed.) intersection of the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 is described below The center of gravity G of the movable side member at the reference position matches or substantially matches with the center of gravity G.
　なお、可動側部材とは、レンズガイド３４１、および、レンズガイド３４１に固定されレンズガイド３４１とともに変位可能な各部材をいう。具体的には、本実施形態の場合、可動側部材は、レンズガイド３４１、レンズ部３３、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａ、ならびに後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１の第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａなどを含んで構成されている。 The movable member refers to the lens guide 341 and each member fixed to the lens guide 341 and displaceable together with the lens guide 341. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the movable side members include the lens guide 341, the lens unit 33, the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a of the AF actuator 345, and the first OIS of the rear OIS actuator 351. It is configured to include a magnet 352a, a second OIS magnet 353a, and the like.
　各スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４の中心とは、たとえば、各スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４のＺ方向の中央位置かつＸ方向中央位置である。また、レンズガイド３４１の基準位置とは、オートフォーカス機能によりレンズガイド３４１がＸ方向に変位していない状態、かつ、後述する第二振れ補正装置３５によりＹ方向に変位していない状態をいう。このような構成により、上記可動側部材の重心Ｇを通りかつＺ方向に平行な直線Ｌ３まわりのレンズガイド３４１の共振が低減される。 The center of each of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 is, for example, the center position in the Z direction and the center position in the X direction of each spring 342a1 to 342a4. The reference position of the lens guide 341 refers to a state where the lens guide 341 is not displaced in the X direction by the autofocus function and a state where the lens guide 341 is not displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 35 described later. By this arrangement, the resonance of the lens guide 341 around the straight line L 3 parallel to the center of gravity G as and Z direction of the movable member is reduced.
　なお、上述のような各スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４は、以下のようにして配置されている。上記重心Ｇを通り第二光軸の方向（つまり、Ｘ方向）に平行な直線を直線Ｌ４（図１８参照）とした場合に、Ｘ方向＋側の一対のスプリング３４２ａ１、３４２ａ２は、上記直線Ｌ４に関して対称、かつ、重心ＧからＸ方向＋側（図１８の右側）に所定距離だけ離れた２箇所位置に配置される。一方、Ｘ方向－側の一対のスプリング３４２ａ３、３４２ａ４は、上記直線Ｌ４に関して対称、かつ、重心ＧからＸ方向－側（図１８の左側）に上記所定距離だけ離れた２箇所位置に配置される。これにより、上記直線Ｌ１と上記直線Ｌ２との交点が、上記重心Ｇに一致する。 The springs 342a1 to 342a4 as described above are arranged as follows. When a straight line passing through the center of gravity G and parallel to the direction of the second optical axis (that is, the X direction) is defined as a straight line L 4 (see FIG. 18), the pair of springs 342a1 and 342a2 on the + side in the X direction are and symmetrically with respect to L 4, they are arranged in two distant positions spaced by a predetermined distance in the X-direction positive side from the center of gravity G (right side in FIG. 18). On the other hand, X-direction - a pair of springs side 342a3,342a4 is symmetrical with respect to the straight line L 4, and, from the center of gravity G X direction - is disposed on the side above a predetermined distance apart two positions (the left side in FIG. 18) You. Thus, the intersection between the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 coincides with the center of gravity G.
　＜第二支持機構＞
　図１３Ａ～図１７を参照して、第二支持機構３４３について説明する。第二支持機構３４３は、レンズガイド３４１を第二ベース３２に、第二ベース３２に対するＸＹ平面内での変位を可能な状態で支持している。ただし、第二支持機構３４３は、レンズガイド３４１を、第二ベース３２に対するＺ方向への変位を規制した状態で支持している。具体的には、第二支持機構３４３は、レンズガイド３４１を、第二ベース３２に対するＺ方向＋側への変位を不能な状態で支持している。 <Second support mechanism>
The second support mechanism 343 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13A to 17. The second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 on the second base 32 such that the lens guide 341 can be displaced in the XY plane with respect to the second base 32. However, the second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 in a state where displacement in the Z direction with respect to the second base 32 is restricted. Specifically, the second support mechanism 343 supports the lens guide 341 in a state in which the lens guide 341 cannot be displaced in the + Z direction with respect to the second base 32.
　第二支持機構３４３は、複数の玉保持部３４３ａ、一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２、接続部材３４３ｄ、および複数の玉３４３ｅを有する。 The second support mechanism 343 has a plurality of ball holding portions 343a, a pair of track members 343b1, 343b2, a connection member 343d, and a plurality of balls 343e.
　複数の玉保持部３４３ａは、レンズガイド３４１の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４のＺ方向＋側の面に設けられている。本実施形態の場合、複数の玉保持部３４３ａは、第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４のＺ方向＋側の面のそれぞれに３個ずつ設けられている。 The plurality of ball holding portions 343a are provided on the surfaces of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4 of the lens guide 341 on the + side in the Z direction. In the case of the present embodiment, three ball holding portions 343a are provided on each of the surfaces on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4.
　一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２はそれぞれ、たとえば、ＸＹ平面に平行な板部材である。このような一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２はそれぞれ、鉄系合金などの磁性金属製である。 The pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are plate members parallel to the XY plane, for example. Each of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 is made of a magnetic metal such as an iron-based alloy.
　Ｙ方向＋側に配置された軌道部材３４３ｂ１と、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａとは、Ｚ方向に平行な同一直線上に配置されている。また、軌道部材３４３ｂ１は、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａよりもＺ方向＋側に配置されている。 軌道 The track member 343b1 and the first OIS magnet 352a arranged on the + side in the Y direction are arranged on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction. Further, the track member 343b1 is disposed on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the first OIS magnet 352a.
　また、Ｙ方向－側に配置された軌道部材３４３ｂ２と、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａとは、Ｚ方向に平行な同一直線上に配置されている。また、軌道部材３４３ｂ２は、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａよりもＺ方向＋側に配置されている。 {Circle around (4)} The track member 343b2 and the second OIS magnet 353a arranged on the negative side in the Y direction are arranged on the same straight line parallel to the Z direction. The track member 343b2 is disposed on the + side in the Z direction with respect to the second OIS magnet 353a.
　このような配置により、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａは、自身の磁力に基づいて、軌道部材３４３ｂ１に近づく方向（つまり、Ｚ方向＋側）に引きつけられている。 With this arrangement, the first OIS magnet 352a is attracted in the direction approaching the track member 343b1 (that is, in the Z direction + side) based on its own magnetic force.
　また、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａは、自身の磁力に基づいて、軌道部材３４３ｂ２に近づく方向（つまり、Ｚ方向＋側）に引きつけられている。 {Circle around (2)} The second OIS magnet 353a is attracted in the direction approaching the track member 343b2 (that is, in the + Z direction) based on its magnetic force.
　このような第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａと、軌道部材３４３ｂ１および軌道部材３４３ｂ２との間に作用する力は、たとえば、スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４が省略された場合（つまり、後述の実施形態２の場合）に、上述の可動側部材を固定側部材（第二ベース３２）から浮かせることが可能である。 Such a force acting between the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a and the track members 343b1 and 343b2 is, for example, when the springs 342a1 to 342a4 are omitted (that is, in the embodiment described later). 2), it is possible to float the movable member described above from the fixed member (second base 32).
　具体的には、一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２はそれぞれ、レンズガイド３４１の第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４よりもＺ方向＋側に、第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４のＺ方向＋側の面と対向した状態で設けられている。 Specifically, the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4 of the lens guide 341 and the + Z direction surface of the second overhang portions 34a3 and 34a4, respectively. It is provided in the state facing.
　一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２はそれぞれ、Ｚ方向－側の面に、平坦面状の軌道面３４３ｃ（図１５および図１６参照）を有する。軌道面３４３ｃはそれぞれ、第二張出部３４ａ３、３４ａ４のＺ方向＋側の面とＺ方向に対向している。 Each of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 has a flat track surface 343c (see FIGS. 15 and 16) on the negative surface in the Z direction. The raceway surface 343c is opposed to the surface on the + Z direction side of the second overhang portions 34a3, 34a4 in the Z direction.
　一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２のＸ方向－側の端部同士は、接続部材３４３ｄにより接続されている。接続部材３４３ｄは、第二カバー３１における天板部３１ａの切欠部３１ｆに配置されている（図１３Ａおよび図１３Ｃ参照）。この状態で、接続部材３４３ｄは、切欠部３１ｆの全体を塞いでいる。これにより、接続部材３４３ｄは、光が、切欠部３１ｆからレンズ部３３に入光することを防止している。また、接続部材３４３ｄは、第二カバー３１に固定されている。第二カバー３１は第二ベース３２に固定されているため、接続部材３４３ｄおよび一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２は、第二カバー３１を介して第二ベース３２に固定されている。 (4) The ends on the negative side in the X direction of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2 are connected by a connection member 343d. The connection member 343d is arranged in the notch 31f of the top plate 31a in the second cover 31 (see FIGS. 13A and 13C). In this state, the connection member 343d covers the entire cutout 31f. Accordingly, the connection member 343d prevents light from entering the lens unit 33 from the cutout 31f. The connection member 343d is fixed to the second cover 31. Since the second cover 31 is fixed to the second base 32, the connection member 343 d and the pair of track members 343 b 1 and 343 b 2 are fixed to the second base 32 via the second cover 31.
　複数の玉３４３ｅはそれぞれ、複数の玉保持部３４３ａに保持されている。このように保持された状態で、複数の玉３４３ｅは、複数の玉保持部３４３ａの内面と、一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２の軌道面３４３ｃとの間に、回転自在な状態で配置されている。複数の玉３４３ｅはそれぞれ、複数の玉保持部３４３ａの内面、および、一対の軌道部材３４３ｂ１の軌道面３４３ｃに当接している。 The plurality of balls 343e are respectively held by the plurality of ball holding units 343a. In this state, the plurality of balls 343e are rotatably disposed between the inner surfaces of the plurality of ball holding portions 343a and the track surfaces 343c of the pair of track members 343b1 and 343b2. . The plurality of balls 343e are in contact with the inner surfaces of the plurality of ball holding portions 343a and the raceway surfaces 343c of the pair of raceway members 343b1, respectively.
　＜ＦＰＣ＞
　図１９～図２１、図２５、および図２６を参照して、ＦＰＣ３４４について説明する。ＦＰＣ３４４は、フレキシブルプリント回路基板であって、第二ベース３２（図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）に固定されている。 <FPC>
The FPC 344 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21, FIG. 25, and FIG. The FPC 344 is a flexible printed circuit board, and is fixed to the second base 32 (see FIGS. 13C and 14).
　ＦＰＣ３４４は、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａと、第一ターミナル部３４ｄ１、第二ターミナル部３４ｄ２、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３、第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４、第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５、第一コントローラ固定部３４ｄ６、第二コントローラ固定部３４ｄ７、ホール素子固定部３４ｄ８、およびＡＦ駆動制御回路３４４ｂ（図２１参照）を有する。 The FPC 344 includes an FPC base portion 344a, a first terminal portion 34d1, a second terminal portion 34d2, a third terminal portion 34d3, a first coil fixing portion 34d4, a second coil fixing portion 34d5, a first controller fixing portion 34d6, and a second controller. It has a fixing section 34d7, a hall element fixing section 34d8, and an AF drive control circuit 344b (see FIG. 21).
　ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａは、ＸＹ平面に平行な板部材であって、第二ベース３２（図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）に固定されている。 The FPC base 344a is a plate member parallel to the XY plane, and is fixed to the second base 32 (see FIGS. 13C and 14).
　第一ターミナル部３４ｄ１および第二ターミナル部３４ｄ２はそれぞれ、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＸ方向＋側の端部においてＹ方向に離れた２箇所から、Ｚ方向＋側に延在している。第一ターミナル部３４ｄ１は、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂに電気的に接続されている。一方、第二ターミナル部３４ｄ２は、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂに電気的に接続されている。 The first terminal portion 34d1 and the second terminal portion 34d2 respectively extend in the Z direction + side from two places separated in the Y direction at the X direction + side end of the FPC base 344a. The first terminal 34d1 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b. On the other hand, the second terminal 34d2 is electrically connected to the second OIS coil 353b.
　第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３は、撮像素子モジュール４が実装されているセンサ基板６（図２１）に接続される。図２１に示されるように、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３は、電源端子Ｔ１、接地端子Ｔ２、データ信号端子Ｔ３、第一クロック端子Ｔ４、および第二クロック端子Ｔ５を有する。ＦＰＣ３４４がセンサ基板６に接続された状態で、このような第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の各端子はそれぞれ、センサ基板６の基板側回路６ａにおいて対応する各端子接続される。 (4) The third terminal portion 34d3 is connected to the sensor substrate 6 (FIG. 21) on which the image sensor module 4 is mounted. As shown in FIG. 21, the third terminal unit 34d3 has a power terminal T1, a ground terminal T2, a data signal terminal T3, a first clock terminal T4, and a second clock terminal T5. In a state where the FPC 344 is connected to the sensor board 6, each terminal of the third terminal portion 34d3 is connected to each corresponding terminal in the board-side circuit 6a of the sensor board 6.
　第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５はそれぞれ、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＺ方向＋側の面において、レンズガイド３４１の第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６とＺ方向に対向する位置に設けられている。具体的には、第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４と第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５とは、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＺ方向＋側の面において、第二光軸を中心にＹ方向における一方側（Ｙ方向＋側）と、Ｙ方向における他方側（Ｙ方向－側）とに離れて設けられている。 The first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are respectively provided at positions facing the first magnet holding portions 34a5, 34a6 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction on the + Z direction surface of the FPC base 344a. ing. Specifically, the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are connected to one side (Y direction + side) of the FPC base 344a in the Y direction centering on the second optical axis on the surface in the Z direction + side. ) And the other side in the Y direction (− side in the Y direction).
　このような第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５にはそれぞれ、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂが固定されている。第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５はそれぞれ、第二ベース３２の底面貫通孔３２ｅ、３２ｆ（図２２および図２３参照）に配置されている。 第一 A first AF coil 346b and a second AF coil 347b are fixed to the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5, respectively. The first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 are respectively disposed in bottom through holes 32e and 32f of the second base 32 (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
　第一コントローラ固定部３４ｄ６および第二コントローラ固定部３４ｄ７はそれぞれ、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＺ方向＋側の面において、第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５の近傍に設けられている。具体的には、第一コントローラ固定部３４ｄ６および第二コントローラ固定部３４ｄ７はそれぞれ、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＺ方向＋側の面において、第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５よりもＸ方向－側の近傍に設けられている。 The first controller fixing part 34d6 and the second controller fixing part 34d7 are provided near the first coil fixing part 34d4 and the second coil fixing part 34d5, respectively, on the surface of the FPC base 344a on the + side in the Z direction. Specifically, the first controller fixing portion 34d6 and the second controller fixing portion 34d7 are respectively more in the X direction than the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 on the + Z direction surface of the FPC base 344a. It is provided near the negative side.
　このような第一コントローラ固定部３４ｄ６および第二コントローラ固定部３４ｄ７にはそれぞれ、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃおよび第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃが固定されている。 第一 A first AF controller 346c and a second AF controller 347c are fixed to the first controller fixing unit 34d6 and the second controller fixing unit 34d7, respectively.
　ホール素子固定部３４ｄ８は、ＦＰＣ基部３４４ａのＺ方向＋側の面において、レンズガイド３４１の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ６（図１６参照）とＺ方向に対向する位置に設けられている。ホール素子固定部３４ｄ８には、後述する後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１のＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄが固定されている。 The Hall element fixing portion 34d8 is provided at a position facing the fourth magnet holding portion 34b6 (see FIG. 16) of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction on the surface of the FPC base 344a on the + side in the Z direction. An OIS Hall element 353d of a rear OIS actuator 351 described later is fixed to the Hall element fixing portion 34d8.
　ＡＦ駆動制御回路３４４ｂは、図２１に示されるように、第一電源ラインＬ１、第二電源ラインＬ２、第一接地ラインＬ３、第二接地ラインＬ４、第一データ信号ラインＬ５、第二データ信号ラインＬ６、第一クロックラインＬ７、第二クロックラインＬ８、第一コイル給電ラインＬ９、Ｌ１０、および第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１、Ｌ１２を有する。 As shown in FIG. 21, the AF drive control circuit 344b includes a first power line L1, a second power line L2, a first ground line L3, a second ground line L4, a first data signal line L5, and a second data signal. It has a line L6, a first clock line L7, a second clock line L8, first coil power supply lines L9, L10, and second coil power supply lines L11, L12.
　第一電源ラインＬ１は、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５から第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃに供給される電流の伝送線路である。第一電源ラインＬ１の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の電源端子Ｔ１に接続されている。第一電源ラインＬ１の他端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの入力側電源端子（不図示）に接続されている。 The first power supply line L1 is a transmission line for a current supplied from the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6 to the first AF controller 346c. One end of the first power supply line L1 is connected to the power supply terminal T1 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the first power supply line L1 is connected to an input-side power supply terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
　第二電源ラインＬ２は、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５から第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃに供給される電流の伝送線路である。第二電源ラインＬ２の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の電源端子Ｔ１に接続されている。第二電源ラインＬ２の他端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの電源入力端子（不図示）に接続されている。以上のように、第一電源ラインＬ１と第二電源ラインＬ２とは、途中で分岐している。 The second power supply line L2 is a transmission line for a current supplied from the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6 to the second AF controller 347c. One end of the second power supply line L2 is connected to the power supply terminal T1 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the second power line L2 is connected to a power input terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c. As described above, the first power supply line L1 and the second power supply line L2 are branched on the way.
　第一接地ラインＬ３は、グラウンド用の伝送線路である。第一接地ラインＬ３の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の接地端子Ｔ２に接続されている。第一接地ラインＬ３の他端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの接地端子（不図示）に接続されている。 The first ground line L3 is a transmission line for ground. One end of the first ground line L3 is connected to the ground terminal T2 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the first ground line L3 is connected to a ground terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
　第二接地ラインＬ４は、グラウンド用の伝送線路である。第二接地ラインＬ４の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の接地端子Ｔ２に接続されている。第二接地ラインＬ４の他端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの接地端子（不図示）に接続されている。第一接地ラインＬ３と第二接地ラインＬ４とは、途中で分岐している。 The second ground line L4 is a transmission line for ground. One end of the second ground line L4 is connected to the ground terminal T2 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the second ground line L4 is connected to a ground terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c. The first ground line L3 and the second ground line L4 are branched on the way.
　第一データ信号ラインＬ５は、制御部５と第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃとの間における制御信号の伝送線路である。第一データ信号ラインＬ５の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３のデータ信号端子Ｔ３に接続されている。第一データ信号ラインＬ５の他端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの入力側データ信号端子（不図示）に接続されている。 The first data signal line L5 is a transmission line for a control signal between the control unit 5 and the first AF controller 346c. One end of the first data signal line L5 is connected to the data signal terminal T3 of the third terminal portion 34d3. The other end of the first data signal line L5 is connected to an input data signal terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
　第二データ信号ラインＬ６は、制御部５と第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃとの間における制御信号の伝送線路である。第二データ信号ラインＬ６の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３のデータ信号端子Ｔ３に接続されている。第二データ信号ラインＬ６の他端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの入力側データ信号端子（不図示）に接続されている。第一データ信号ラインＬ５と第二データ信号ラインＬ６とは、途中で分岐している。 The second data signal line L6 is a control signal transmission line between the control unit 5 and the second AF controller 347c. One end of the second data signal line L6 is connected to the data signal terminal T3 of the third terminal part 34d3. The other end of the second data signal line L6 is connected to an input-side data signal terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c. The first data signal line L5 and the second data signal line L6 are branched on the way.
　第一クロックラインＬ７は、制御部５と第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃとの間におけるクロック信号の伝送線路である。第一クロックラインＬ７の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の第一クロック端子Ｔ４に接続されている。第一クロックラインＬ７の他端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃのクロック端子（不図示）に接続されている。 The first clock line L7 is a transmission line of a clock signal between the control unit 5 and the first AF controller 346c. One end of the first clock line L7 is connected to the first clock terminal T4 of the third terminal 34d3. The other end of the first clock line L7 is connected to a clock terminal (not shown) of the first AF controller 346c.
　第二クロックラインＬ８は、制御部５と第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃとの間におけるクロック信号の伝送線路である。第二クロックラインＬ８の一端は、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３の第二クロック端子Ｔ５に接続されている。第二クロックラインＬ８の他端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃのクロック端子（不図示）に接続されている。 The second clock line L8 is a transmission line of a clock signal between the control unit 5 and the second AF controller 347c. One end of the second clock line L8 is connected to the second clock terminal T5 of the third terminal 34d3. The other end of the second clock line L8 is connected to a clock terminal (not shown) of the second AF controller 347c.
　第一コイル給電ラインＬ９、Ｌ１０は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃと第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂとを接続する伝送線路である。 The first coil power supply lines L9 and L10 are transmission lines that connect the first AF controller 346c and the first AF coil 346b.
　第一コイル給電ラインＬ９の一端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの出力側電源端子における第一端子（不図示）に接続されている。第一コイル給電ラインＬ９の他端は、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの一端に接続されている。 一端 One end of the first coil power supply line L9 is connected to a first terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the first AF controller 346c. The other end of the first coil power supply line L9 is connected to one end of the first AF coil 346b.
　第一コイル給電ラインＬ１０の一端は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの出力側電源端子における第二端子（不図示）に接続されている。第一コイル給電ラインＬ１０の他端は、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの他端に接続されている。 一端 One end of the first coil power supply line L10 is connected to a second terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the first AF controller 346c. The other end of the first coil power supply line L10 is connected to the other end of the first AF coil 346b.
　第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１、Ｌ１２は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃと第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂとを接続する伝送線路である。 The second coil power supply lines L11 and L12 are transmission lines that connect the second AF controller 347c and the second AF coil 347b.
　第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１の一端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの出力側電源端子における第一端子（不図示）に接続されている。第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１の他端は、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの一端に接続されている。 一端 One end of the second coil power supply line L11 is connected to a first terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the second AF controller 347c. The other end of the second coil power supply line L11 is connected to one end of the second AF coil 347b.
　第二コイル給電ラインＬ１２の一端は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの出力側電源端子における第二端子（不図示）に接続されている。第二コイル給電ラインＬ１２の他端は、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの他端に接続されている。 一端 One end of the second coil power supply line L12 is connected to a second terminal (not shown) of the output side power supply terminal of the second AF controller 347c. The other end of the second coil power supply line L12 is connected to the other end of the second AF coil 347b.
　以上のようなＡＦ駆動制御回路３４４ｂは、第三ターミナル部３４ｄ３を介して、センサ基板６に接続される。これにより、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃおよび第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃは、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５に接続される。 The AF drive control circuit 344b as described above is connected to the sensor substrate 6 via the third terminal 34d3. Thus, the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c are connected to the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
　＜ＡＦアクチュエータ＞
　図１５、図１６、および図２０を参照して、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５について説明する。ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５（第三アクチュエータともいう。）は、オートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１をＸ方向（第二光軸の方向）に変位させる駆動機構である。 <AF actuator>
The AF actuator 345 will be described with reference to FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. The AF actuator 345 (also referred to as a third actuator) is a driving mechanism that displaces the lens guide 341 in the X direction (direction of the second optical axis) during autofocus.
　ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、Ｙ方向＋側に配置された第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６と、Ｙ方向－側に配置された第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７とを有する。 The AF actuator 345 has a first AF actuator 346 disposed on the + side in the Y direction and a second AF actuator 347 disposed on the − side in the Y direction.
　第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６は、駆動機構部であって、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａ、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂ、第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４６ｄ、および第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃを有する。 The first AF actuator 346 is a driving mechanism, and includes a first AF magnet 346a, a first AF coil 346b, a first X position detection magnet 346d, and a first AF controller 346c.
　第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７は、駆動機構部であって、第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａ、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂ、第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４７ｄ、および第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃを有する。 The second AF actuator 347 is a driving mechanism, and includes a second AF magnet 347a, a second AF coil 347b, a second X position detection magnet 347d, and a second AF controller 347c.
　このような第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６および第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７は、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａが、可動側部材であるレンズガイド３４１に固定されるとともに、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂが、固定側部材である第二ベース３２に固定されたムービングマグネット型のアクチュエータである。 In such a first AF actuator 346 and a second AF actuator 347, the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are fixed to the lens guide 341 which is a movable member, and the first AF coil 346b and the The second AF coil 347b is a moving magnet type actuator fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed side member.
　なお、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６および第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７は、ムービングコイル型のアクチュエータであってもよい。以下、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５を構成する各部の配置について説明する。 The first AF actuator 346 and the second AF actuator 347 may be moving coil type actuators. Hereinafter, the arrangement of each unit constituting the AF actuator 345 will be described.
　第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａはそれぞれ、レンズガイド３４１の第一マグネット保持部３４ａ５、３４ａ６に保持されている。この状態で第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａはそれぞれ、第二ベース３２の一対のコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊ（図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）のＺ方向＋側に配置されている。本実施形態の場合、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａはそれぞれ、Ｙ方向に隣り合うように並べられた２個のマグネット要素（符号省略）からなる。これら各マグネット要素は、Ｚ方向に着磁され、磁極の向きが反対になるように配置されている。 The first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are held by the first magnet holding portions 34a5 and 34a6 of the lens guide 341 respectively. In this state, the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are respectively disposed on the + side in the Z direction of the pair of coil mounting portions 32i, 32j (see FIGS. 13C and 14) of the second base 32. In the case of the present embodiment, each of the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a is composed of two magnet elements (reference numerals are omitted) arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the Y direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and arranged so that the directions of the magnetic poles are opposite.
　また、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａはそれぞれ、Ｘ方向に長く、かつ、たとえば、Ｙ方向から見た（図１５および図１６に示す状態）の形状が略矩形状の直方体である。 Each of the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the X direction and, for example, has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). .
　第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂはそれぞれ、オートフォーカス時に給電される長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂはそれぞれ、長軸がＹ方向に一致した状態で、ＦＰＣ３４４の第一コイル固定部３４ｄ４および第二コイル固定部３４ｄ５に基板（不図示）を介して固定されている。 The first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b are so-called elliptical so-called air-core coils that are supplied with power during auto focus. The first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b are fixed to the first coil fixing portion 34d4 and the second coil fixing portion 34d5 of the FPC 344 via a substrate (not shown), respectively, in a state where the long axes are aligned with the Y direction. Have been.
　図２１に示されるように、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂは、第一コイル給電ラインＬ９、Ｌ１０を介して、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃと接続されている。第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃにより制御される。 第一 As shown in FIG. 21, the first AF coil 346b is connected to the first AF controller 346c via the first coil power supply lines L9 and L10. The current value of the first AF coil 346b is controlled by the first AF controller 346c.
　第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４６ｄおよび第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４７ｄは、Ｚ方向に着磁され、たとえば、Ｙ方向から見た（図１５および図１６に示す状態）の形状が略矩形状の直方体である。このような第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４６ｄおよび第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４７ｄはそれぞれ、レンズガイド３４１の一対の第三マグネット保持部３４ｂ３、３４ｂ４に保持されている。 The first X position detection magnet 346d and the second X position detection magnet 347d are magnetized in the Z direction, and are, for example, rectangular parallelepipeds having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). is there. Such a first X position detection magnet 346d and a second X position detection magnet 347d are respectively held by a pair of third magnet holding portions 34b3, 34b4 of the lens guide 341.
　第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃは、ＦＰＣ３４４の第一コントローラ固定部３４ｄ６に固定されている。このような第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃは、図２１に示されるように、第一検出部３４６ｅと、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆとを有する。 The first AF controller 346c is fixed to the first controller fixing portion 34d6 of the FPC 344. As shown in FIG. 21, such a first AF controller 346c has a first detection unit 346e and a first drive control unit 346f.
　第一検出部３４６ｅは、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａと第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４６ｄとの間の磁束（位置に関する情報ともいう。）を検出する。第一検出部３４６ｅは、検出値を、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆに送る。 The first detector 346e detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) between the first AF magnet 346a and the first X position detection magnet 346d. The first detection unit 346e sends the detection value to the first drive control unit 346f.
　第一駆動制御部３４６ｆは、第一検出部３４６ｅから受け取った検出値に基づいて、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａのＸ方向における位置（第一位置ともいう。）を求める。そして、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆは、第一検出部３４６ｅから受け取った検出値に基づいて、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値を制御する。なお、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃは、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値に関する制御は行わない。 The first drive control unit 346f obtains a position (also referred to as a first position) of the first AF magnet 346a in the X direction based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 346e. Then, the first drive control unit 346f controls the current value of the first AF coil 346b based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 346e. Note that the first AF controller 346c does not control the current value of the second AF coil 347b.
　以上のように第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６においては、第一検出部３４６ｅの検出値に基づいて、クローズドループ制御が行われる。なお、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆは省略されてもよい。この場合には、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆが行う処理は、たとえば、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５により行われてもよい。 As described above, in the first AF actuator 346, the closed loop control is performed based on the detection value of the first detection unit 346e. Note that the first drive control unit 346f may be omitted. In this case, the processing performed by the first drive control unit 346f may be performed by, for example, the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
　また、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃは、ＦＰＣ３４４の第二コントローラ固定部３４ｄ７に固定されている。このような第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃは、図２１に示されるように、第二検出部３４７ｅと、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆとを有する。 {Circle around (2)} The second AF controller 347c is fixed to the second controller fixing portion 34d7 of the FPC 344. As shown in FIG. 21, the second AF controller 347c includes a second detection unit 347e and a second drive control unit 347f.
　第二検出部３４７ｅは、第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａと第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット３４７ｄとの間の磁束（位置に関する情報ともいう。）を検出する。第二検出部３４７ｅは、検出値を、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆに送る。 The second detector 347e detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) between the second AF magnet 347a and the second X position detection magnet 347d. The second detector 347e sends the detected value to the second drive controller 347f.
　第二駆動制御部３４７ｆは、第二検出部３４７ｅから受け取った検出値（位置に関する情報）に基づいて、第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａのＸ方向における位置（第二位置ともいう。）を求める。また、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆは、第二検出部３４７ｅから受け取った検出値に基づいて、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値を制御する。なお、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃは、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値に関する制御は行わない。 The second drive control unit 347f obtains a position (also referred to as a second position) of the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction based on the detection value (information regarding the position) received from the second detection unit 347e. Further, the second drive control unit 347f controls the current value of the second AF coil 347b based on the detection value received from the second detection unit 347e. Note that the second AF controller 347c does not control the current value of the first AF coil 346b.
　以上のように第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７においては、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの検出値に基づいて、クローズドループ制御が行われる。なお、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆは省略されてもよい。この場合には、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆが行う処理は、たとえば、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５により行われてもよい。 As described above, in the second AF actuator 347, closed loop control is performed based on the detection value of the second AF controller 347c. Note that the second drive control unit 347f may be omitted. In this case, the process performed by the second drive control unit 347f may be performed by, for example, the control unit 5 mounted on the sensor board 6.
　上述のような構成を有する第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６および第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７の場合、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃおよび第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの制御下で、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂに電流が流れると、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａをＸ方向に変位させるローレンツ力（推力）が生じる。 In the case of the first AF actuator 346 and the second AF actuator 347 having the above-described configurations, the current is supplied to the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b under the control of the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c. Flows, a Lorentz force (thrust) for displacing the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction is generated.
　このような推力は、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより切り換わる。これにより、レンズガイド３４１の変位方向を切り換えられる。 Such thrust is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lens guide 341 can be switched.
　本実施形態の構成は、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６の第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７の第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値とを独立して制御することにより、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が発生する推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が発生する推力とを異ならせることができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the current value of the first AF coil 346b of the first AF actuator 346 and the current value of the second AF coil 347b of the second AF actuator 347 are controlled independently, so that the first AF The thrust generated by the actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 can be made different.
　具体的には、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が発生する推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が発生する推力とが同じ場合には、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５が発生する推力は、Ｘ方向の第一推力のみからなる。一方、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が発生する推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が発生する推力とが異なる場合には、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５が発生する推力は、Ｘ方向の第一推力と、可動側部材の重心Ｇまわりのモーメントである第二推力とを有する。 Specifically, when the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 are the same, the thrust generated by the AF actuator 345 includes only the first thrust in the X direction. . On the other hand, when the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 is different from the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347, the thrust generated by the AF actuator 345 is equal to the first thrust in the X direction and the thrust of the movable member. And a second thrust which is a moment about the center of gravity G.
　このような第二推力は、オートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１をＸ方向から逸脱させようとする外力に抗する抵抗力となる。これにより、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、オートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向からの逸脱量を少なくまたはゼロにできる。なお、上述の外力については、後述する。 第二 The second thrust is a resistance against an external force that tends to cause the lens guide 341 to deviate from the X direction during autofocus. This allows the AF actuator 345 to reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the X direction during autofocus. The above-mentioned external force will be described later.
　また、本実施形態の場合、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、後述する第二振れ補正装置３５が振れ補正を行う際に、可動側部材（レンズガイド３４１）をＹ方向から逸脱させるように作用する外力に抗する抵抗力を生成する第二駆動機構部でもある。 In the case of the present embodiment, the AF actuator 345 resists an external force acting so as to deviate the movable member (the lens guide 341) from the Y direction when the second shake correction device 35 described later performs shake correction. It is also a second drive mechanism that generates a resistance force.
　つまり、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、後述する第二振れ補正装置３５が振れ補正を行う際に、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃおよび第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃにより、第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａのＸ方向における位置を検出する。 That is, when the second shake correction device 35 described later performs shake correction, the AF actuator 345 controls the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a in the X direction by the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c. The position at is detected.
　そして、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃおよび第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃはそれぞれ、検出値に基づいて、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値を制御する。これにより、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、第二振れ補正装置３５が振れ補正を行う際、レンズガイド３４１をＹ方向から逸脱させようとする外力に対する抵抗力を生成する。この結果、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、振れ補正の際、レンズガイド３４１のＹ方向からの逸脱量を少なくまたはゼロにできる。 第一 Then, the first AF controller 346c and the second AF controller 347c respectively control the current values of the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b based on the detected values. Accordingly, when the second shake correction device 35 performs shake correction, the AF actuator 345 generates a resistance to an external force that causes the lens guide 341 to deviate from the Y direction. As a result, the AF actuator 345 can reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the Y direction during shake correction.
　＜第二振れ補正装置＞
　図１５、図１６、および図２０を参照して、第二振れ補正装置３５について説明する。第二振れ補正装置３５は、駆動部であって、レンズ部３３をＹ方向に変位させることにより、Ｙ方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第二振れ補正装置３５は、上述の第二収容空間３２ｃ（図２参照）に配置されている。 <Second shake correction device>
The second shake correction device 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. The second shake correction device 35 is a drive unit, and performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction. Such a second shake correction device 35 is disposed in the above-described second accommodation space 32c (see FIG. 2).
　第二振れ補正装置３５は、上述したレンズガイド３４１、上述した複数個のスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４、上述したＦＰＣ３４４、および後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１を有する。 The second shake correction device 35 includes the above-described lens guide 341, the above-described plurality of springs 342a1 to 342a4, the above-described FPC 344, and the rear OIS actuator 351.
　レンズガイド３４１、スプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４、およびＦＰＣ３４４は、ＡＦ装置３４と共通である。 The lens guide 341, the springs 342a1 to 342a4, and the FPC 344 are common to the AF device 34.
　後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１（第二アクチュエータともいう。）は、駆動機構であって、Ｙ方向＋側に配置された第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２と、Ｙ方向－側に配置された第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３とを有する。 The rear OIS actuator 351 (also referred to as a second actuator) is a driving mechanism, and includes a first OIS actuator 352 disposed on the + side in the Y direction and a second OIS actuator 353 disposed on the − side in the Y direction. Having.
　図１５に示されるように、第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２は、駆動機構部であって、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６に対して、Ｚ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置されている。このような第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２は、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａ、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ、およびＹ位置検出マグネット３５２ｃを有する。 As shown in FIG. 15, the first OIS actuator 352 is a driving mechanism, and is arranged so as to overlap the first AF actuator 346 at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Such a first OIS actuator 352 has a first OIS magnet 352a, a first OIS coil 352b, and a Y position detection magnet 352c.
　図１６に示されるように、第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３は、駆動機構部であって、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７に対して、Ｚ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置されている。このような第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３は、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａ、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ、Ｙ位置検出マグネット３５３ｃ、およびＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄを有する。 As shown in FIG. 16, the second OIS actuator 353 is a driving mechanism and is arranged so as to overlap the second AF actuator 347 at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Such a second OIS actuator 353 has a second OIS magnet 353a, a second OIS coil 353b, a Y position detection magnet 353c, and an OIS Hall element 353d.
　第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２および第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３と、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６および第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７とを上述のように配置することにより、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１の駆動力の中心が、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５の駆動力の中心に一致または近くなる。この構成により、オートフォーカスおよび振れ補正の際、レンズガイド３４１がチルト変位（つまり、Ｙ方向またはＺ方向に平行な軸を中心とした揺動変位）しにくくなる。 By arranging the first OIS actuator 352 and the second OIS actuator 353 and the first AF actuator 346 and the second AF actuator 347 as described above, the center of the driving force of the rear OIS actuator 351 is adjusted to the AF actuator 345. To or near the center of the driving force. This configuration makes it difficult for the lens guide 341 to undergo tilt displacement (that is, swing displacement about an axis parallel to the Y direction or the Z direction) during autofocus and shake correction.
　上述のような後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１は、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａが可動側部材であるレンズガイド３４１に固定されるとともに第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂが固定側部材である第二ベース３２に固定されたムービングマグネット型のアクチュエータである。ただし、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１はムービングコイル型のアクチュエータであってもよい。 In the rear OIS actuator 351 as described above, the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are fixed to the lens guide 341 which is a movable member, and the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed. The moving magnet type actuator is fixed to the second base 32 as a member. However, the rear OIS actuator 351 may be a moving coil type actuator.
　第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａはそれぞれ、レンズガイド３４１の第二マグネット保持部３４ａ７および第二マグネット保持部３４ａ８に保持されている。 The first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are held by the second magnet holding portion 34a7 and the second magnet holding portion 34a8 of the lens guide 341 respectively.
　本実施形態の場合、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａはそれぞれ、Ｙ方向に隣り合うように並べられた２個のマグネット要素（符号省略）からなる。これら各マグネット要素は、Ｚ方向に着磁され、磁極の向きが反対になるように配置されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, each of the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a is composed of two magnet elements (symbols omitted) arranged side by side in the Y direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and arranged so that the directions of the magnetic poles are opposite.
　第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂはそれぞれ、振れ補正時に給電される長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂはそれぞれ、長軸がＸ方向に一致した状態で、第二ベース３２のコイル載置部３２ｉ、３２ｊに固定されている。この状態で、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂはそれぞれ、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａとＺ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。 The first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are each an elliptic so-called air-core coil that is supplied with power at the time of shake correction. The first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed to the coil mounting portions 32i and 32j of the second base 32, respectively, with their major axes aligned in the X direction. In this state, the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b overlap with the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a, respectively, at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
　上述のように第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２（第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ）の少なくとも一部は、Ｚ方向において、レンズガイド３４１の第一張出部３４ａ１と第二張出部３４ａ３との間に配置されている。一方、第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３（第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ）の少なくとも一部は、Ｚ方向において、レンズガイド３４１の第一張出部３４ａ２と第二張出部３４ａ４との間に配置されている。このような構成は、レンズモジュール３、延いてはカメラモジュール１の低背化に効果的である。 As described above, at least a part of the first OIS actuator 352 (the first OIS magnet 352a and the first OIS coil 352b) has the first overhang portion 34a1 and the second overhang portion 34a3 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction. It is located between. On the other hand, at least a part of the second OIS actuator 353 (the second OIS magnet 353a and the second OIS coil 353b) is located between the first overhang portion 34a2 and the second overhang portion 34a4 of the lens guide 341 in the Z direction. Are located in Such a configuration is effective for reducing the height of the lens module 3 and thus the camera module 1.
　Ｙ位置検出マグネット３５２ｃは、レンズガイド３４１の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ５に保持されている。また、Ｙ位置検出マグネット３５３ｃは、レンズガイド３４１の第四マグネット保持部３４ｂ６に保持されている。 The Y position detection magnet 352c is held by the fourth magnet holding portion 34b5 of the lens guide 341. The Y position detection magnet 353c is held by the fourth magnet holding portion 34b6 of the lens guide 341.
　ＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄは、図１２に示されるように、ＦＰＣ３４４のホール素子固定部３４ｄ８（図１９参照）に固定されている。ＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄは、Ｙ位置検出マグネット３５３ｃの磁束（位置に関する情報ともいう。）を検出し、検出値を、センサ基板６に実装された制御部５（図２１参照）に送る。制御部５は、ＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄから受け取った検出値に基づいて、Ｙ位置検出マグネット３５３ｃ（つまり、レンズガイド３４１）のＹ方向における位置を求める。 As shown in FIG. 12, the OIS Hall element 353d is fixed to the Hall element fixing portion 34d8 (see FIG. 19) of the FPC 344. The OIS Hall element 353d detects a magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the Y position detection magnet 353c, and sends a detection value to the control unit 5 (see FIG. 21) mounted on the sensor board 6. The control unit 5 obtains the position of the Y position detection magnet 353c (that is, the lens guide 341) in the Y direction based on the detection value received from the OIS Hall element 353d.
　以上のような構成を有する後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１の場合、制御部５の制御下で、ＦＰＣ３４４を介して第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂに電流が流れると、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａをＹ方向に変位させるローレンツ力が生じる。第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａはそれぞれレンズガイド３４１に固定されているため、上記ローレンツ力に基づいてレンズガイド３４１が、Ｙ方向に変位する。なお、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより、レンズガイド３４１の変位方向が切り換わる。 In the case of the rear OIS actuator 351 having the above configuration, when a current flows through the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b via the FPC 344 under the control of the control unit 5, the first OIS magnet 352a and A Lorentz force for displacing the second OIS magnet 353a in the Y direction is generated. Since the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a are each fixed to the lens guide 341, the lens guide 341 is displaced in the Y direction based on the Lorentz force. The direction of displacement of the lens guide 341 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b.
　なお、本実施形態の場合、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１と、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５とのクロストークを防止するために、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａと第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａとのＺ方向における間、および、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａと第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａとのＺ方向における間に、磁性金属製のシールド板７ａ、７ｂ（図１９および図２０参照）が配置されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, in order to prevent crosstalk between the rear OIS actuator 351 and the AF actuator 345, a space between the first OIS magnet 352a and the first AF magnet 346a in the Z direction and a second Between the OIS magnet 353a and the second AF magnet 347a in the Z direction, shield plates 7a and 7b (see FIGS. 19 and 20) made of magnetic metal are arranged.
　＜撮像素子モジュール＞
　撮像素子モジュール４は、レンズ部３３よりもＸ方向＋側に配置されている。撮像素子モジュール４は、たとえばＣＣＤ（charge-coupled device）型イメージセンサー、ＣＭＯＳ（complementary metal oxide semiconductor）型イメージセンサーなどの撮像素子を含んで構成される。撮像素子モジュール４の撮像素子は、レンズ部３３により結像された被写体像を撮像し、被写体像に対応する電気信号を出力する。撮像素子モジュール４にはセンサ基板６が電気的に接続され、センサ基板６を介して撮像素子モジュール４への給電及び撮像素子モジュール４で撮像された被写体像の電気信号の出力が行われる。このような撮像素子モジュール４は、従来から知られている構造のものを採用できる。 <Imaging device module>
The image sensor module 4 is arranged on the + side in the X direction with respect to the lens unit 33. The image sensor module 4 includes an image sensor such as a charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor and a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) image sensor. The image sensor of the image sensor module 4 captures a subject image formed by the lens unit 33 and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the subject image. A sensor substrate 6 is electrically connected to the image sensor module 4, and power is supplied to the image sensor module 4 via the sensor substrate 6 and an electric signal of a subject image picked up by the image sensor module 4 is output. Such an image sensor module 4 may have a conventionally known structure.
　＜第二振れ補正装置およびＡＦ装置の動作＞
　以下、図２１および図２８を参照して、本実施形態の第二振れ補正装置３５およびＡＦ装置３４の動作について説明する。なお、第一振れ補正装置２４の動作については、説明を省略する。 <Operations of second shake correction device and AF device>
Hereinafter, the operations of the second shake correction device 35 and the AF device 34 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the operation of the first shake correction device 24 is omitted.
　第二振れ補正装置３５において振れ補正を行う場合には、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂへの給電が行われる。具体的には、第二振れ補正装置３５では、カメラモジュール１のＹ方向の振れが相殺されるように、振れ検出部（図示略、例えばジャイロセンサー）からの検出信号に基づいて、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂの電流値が制御される。このような制御は、たとえば、制御部５により行われる。このとき、ＯＩＳホール素子３５３ｄの検出値を制御部５にフィードバックすることで、レンズガイド３４１の変位を正確に制御することができる。 When the second shake correcting device 35 performs shake correction, power is supplied to the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b. Specifically, in the second shake correction device 35, the first OIS is detected based on a detection signal from a shake detection unit (not shown, for example, a gyro sensor) so that the shake in the Y direction of the camera module 1 is canceled. The current values of the coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are controlled. Such control is performed by the control unit 5, for example. At this time, the displacement of the lens guide 341 can be accurately controlled by feeding back the detection value of the OIS Hall element 353d to the control unit 5.
　第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂに給電すると、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂに流れる電流と第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａの磁界、および、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂに流れる電流と第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａの磁界との相互作用により、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂにローレンツ力が生じる（フレミング左手の法則）。 When power is supplied to the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b, the current flowing through the first OIS coil 352b and the magnetic field of the first OIS magnet 352a, and the current flowing through the second OIS coil 353b and the magnetic field of the second OIS magnet 353a Interacts with each other, a Lorentz force is generated in the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b (Fleming's left-hand rule).
　本実施形態の場合、ローレンツ力の方向は、Ｙ方向における一方または他方の何れかの方向（特定方向ともいう。）である。第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂおよび第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂは、第二ベース３２に固定されているので、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａに反力が働く。この反力がＯＩＳ用ボイスコイルモーターの駆動力となり、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａおよび第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａを保持するレンズガイド３４１がＸＹ平面内でＹ方向に変位し、振れ補正が行われる。 In the case of the present embodiment, the direction of the Lorentz force is one of the directions in the Y direction or the other direction (also referred to as a specific direction). Since the first OIS coil 352b and the second OIS coil 353b are fixed to the second base 32, a reaction force acts on the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a. This reaction force becomes the driving force of the voice coil motor for OIS, and the lens guide 341 holding the first OIS magnet 352a and the second OIS magnet 353a is displaced in the Y direction on the XY plane, and shake correction is performed.
　上述のような振れ補正は、レンズガイド３４１を、たとえば、図２７の矢印ＡＹ１のようにＹ方向に平行に変位させると好ましい。ところが、振れ補正の際、レンズガイド３４１の変位をＹ方向から逸脱させるような外力（たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｆの方向のモーメント）が、レンズガイド３４１に作用する場合がある。このような外力が作用すると、レンズガイド３４１に作用する推力が、第二振れ補正装置３５が生成するＹ方向に平行な推力（第一推力）のみだと、レンズガイド３４１は、図２７の矢印ＡＹ２のように、Ｙ方向から逸脱した方向に変位してしまう。なお、上述の外力は、たとえば、上述の第一支持機構３４２を構成するスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４における分散配置の中心位置（図１８の直線Ｌ１と直線Ｌ２との交点）と、上述の可動側部材の重心Ｇとのずれに起因して生じる可能性がある。あるいは、上述の外力は、たとえば、第一支持機構３４２を構成するスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４の個体差に起因して生じる可能性がある。このような外力は、上述のモーメントだけでなく、たとえば、Ｘ方向を向いた力の場合もある。あるいは、外力は、モーメントおよびＸ方向を向いた力を含む場合もある。 The above-described shake correction is preferably performed by displacing the lens guide 341 in parallel with the Y direction, for example, as indicated by an arrow AY1 in FIG. However, at the time of shake correction, an external force (for example, a moment in the direction of arrow Af in FIG. 27) that causes the displacement of the lens guide 341 to deviate from the Y direction may act on the lens guide 341. When such an external force acts, if the only thrust acting on the lens guide 341 is a thrust (first thrust) parallel to the Y direction generated by the second shake correction device 35, the lens guide 341 will turn to the arrow in FIG. A Displacement occurs in a direction deviating from the Y direction as in A Y2 . Incidentally, the external force described above, for example, the center position of the distributed arrangement in the spring 342a1 ~ 342a4 constituting the first supporting mechanism 342 described above (the point of intersection of the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 in FIG. 18), the movable side of the above There is a possibility that the deviation may occur due to a deviation from the center of gravity G of the member. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the above-described external force is generated due to individual differences of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 constituting the first support mechanism 342, for example. Such an external force may be, for example, a force directed in the X direction, in addition to the moment described above. Alternatively, the external force may include a moment and a force directed in the X direction.
　これに対して、本実施形態の場合、振れ補正の際、制御部５の制御下で、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５を駆動して、上記外力に抗する抵抗力（第二推力。）を生成する。具体的には、振れ補正の際、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃ（つまり、第一検出部３４６ｅ）により第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａの位置を検出するとともに、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃ（つまり、第二検出部３４７ｅ）により第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａの位置を検出する。 On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, at the time of shake correction, the AF actuator 345 is driven under the control of the control unit 5 to generate a resistance (second thrust) against the external force. Specifically, at the time of shake correction, the AF actuator 345 detects the position of the first AF magnet 346a by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first detection unit 346e), and also detects the position of the second AF controller 347c (that is, The position of the second AF magnet 347a is detected by the second detector 347e).
　そして、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃ（つまり、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆ）は、制御部５から受け取った制御信号（たとえば、振れ補正のための変位方向および変位量）、および、第一検出部３４６ｅの検出値に基づいて、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値（以下、第一電流値という。）を制御する。これとともに、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃ（つまり、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆ）は、第二検出部３４７ｅの検出値に基づいて、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値（以下、第二電流値という。）を制御する。これにより、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６の推力と第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７の推力とに基づいて上述の抵抗力（たとえば、モーメント）を生成する。 Then, the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first drive control unit 346f) receives the control signal (for example, the displacement direction and the displacement amount for shake correction) received from the control unit 5 and the first detection unit 346e. A current value of the first AF coil 346b (hereinafter, referred to as a first current value) is controlled based on the detected value. At the same time, the second AF controller 347c (that is, the second drive control unit 347f) performs a current value of the second AF coil 347b (hereinafter, referred to as a second current value) based on the detection value of the second detection unit 347e. Control. Thus, the AF actuator 345 generates the above-described resistance (for example, moment) based on the thrust of the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust of the second AF actuator 347.
　なお、第一電流値および第二電流値は、たとえば、事前に行われたキャリブレーションにより、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆおよび第二駆動制御部３４７ｆに記憶された予備データから選択される。この予備データは、たとえば、第二振れ補正装置３５によりレンズガイド３４１をＹ方向に変位させた場合の、変位方向（たとえば、図２７の矢印ＡＹ１の方向）、変位量Ｄ１（図２７参照）、レンズガイド３４１のＹ方向からの逸脱方向（たとえば、図２７の矢印ＡＹの方向）、およびレンズガイド３４１のＹ方向からの逸脱量Ｄ２（図２７参照）からなる振れ補正用パラメータと、この補正用パラメータに対応付けて記憶された上記逸脱量Ｄ２をゼロにする第一電流値および第二電流値とを含む。上述のキャリブレーションは、レンズガイド３４１のＹ方向における全ストロークの範囲で、上記振れ補正用パラメータに対応する第一電流値および第二電流値を求める。 The first current value and the second current value are selected from the preliminary data stored in the first drive control unit 346f and the second drive control unit 347f by, for example, calibration performed in advance. The preliminary data includes, for example, the displacement direction (for example, the direction of arrow A Y1 in FIG. 27) and the displacement amount D 1 (see FIG. 27) when the lens guide 341 is displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 35. ), A deviation direction of the lens guide 341 from the Y direction (for example, the direction of the arrow AY in FIG. 27), and a deviation correction parameter D 2 from the Y direction of the lens guide 341 (see FIG. 27). , and a first current value and second current value to the deviation amount D 2 stored in association with the correction parameter to zero. In the above-described calibration, a first current value and a second current value corresponding to the shake correction parameter are obtained in a range of the entire stroke of the lens guide 341 in the Y direction.
　上述の外力に対してＡＦアクチュエータ３４５が生成する抵抗力は、たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｒの方向の回転モーメントである。そして、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、生成した抵抗力を、レンズガイド３４１に作用させる。この結果、第二振れ補正装置３５が生成するＹ方向（特定方向ともいう。）に平行な推力と、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５により生成された抵抗力との合力が作用したレンズガイド３４１は、上記外力が作用している状態において、図２７の矢印ＡＹ１のようにＹ方向に平行に変位できる。 Resistance force AF actuator 345 generates for the above-described external force, for example, a rotational moment in the direction of arrow A r in FIG. Then, the AF actuator 345 causes the generated resistance to act on the lens guide 341. As a result, the lens guide 341 exerted by the resultant force of the thrust parallel to the Y direction (also referred to as a specific direction) generated by the second shake correction device 35 and the resistance generated by the AF actuator 345 acts on the lens guide 341. In the operating state, it can be displaced parallel to the Y direction as indicated by an arrow A Y1 in FIG.
　また、ＡＦ装置３４においてオートフォーカスを行う場合には、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂへの給電が行われる。本実施形態の場合、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂにおける電流値は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃによって制御される。また、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂにおける電流値は、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃによって制御される。 When the AF device 34 performs autofocus, power is supplied to the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b. In the case of the present embodiment, the current value in the first AF coil 346b is controlled by the first AF controller 346c. The current value in the second AF coil 347b is controlled by the second AF controller 347c.
　具体的には、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃは、制御部５から第一データ信号ラインＬ５を介して受け取った制御信号と、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃの第一検出部３４６ｅの検出値に基づいて、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値（第一電流値）を制御する。 Specifically, the first AF controller 346c determines a second AF signal based on a control signal received from the control unit 5 via the first data signal line L5 and a detection value of the first detection unit 346e of the first AF controller 346c. The current value (first current value) of one AF coil 346b is controlled.
　また、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃは、制御部５から第二データ信号ラインＬ６を介して受け取った制御信号と、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃの第二検出部３４７ｅの検出値に基づいて、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値（第二電流値）を制御する。 Further, the second AF controller 347c is configured to control the second AF coil based on the control signal received from the control unit 5 via the second data signal line L6 and the detection value of the second detection unit 347e of the second AF controller 347c. The current value of 347b (second current value) is controlled.
　第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂに給電すると、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂに流れる電流と第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａの磁界、および、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂに流れる電流と第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａの磁界との相互作用により、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂにローレンツ力が生じる。 When power is supplied to the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b, the current flowing through the first AF coil 346b and the magnetic field of the first AF magnet 346a, and the current flowing through the second AF coil 347b and the magnetic field of the second AF magnet 347a Interacts with each other, a Lorentz force is generated in the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b.
　第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂから発生するローレンツ力と、第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂから発生するローレンツ力の向きおよび大きさが等しい場合、これら各ローレンツ力の合力の方向は、Ｘ方向における一方または他方の何れかである。第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａおよび第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａは、第二ベース３２に固定されているので、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂに反力が働く。この反力がＡＦ用ボイスコイルモーターの駆動力となり、第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂおよび第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂを保持するレンズガイド３４１がＸ方向（第二光軸の方向）に移動し、オートフォーカスが行われる。 When the direction and magnitude of the Lorentz force generated from the first AF coil 346b and the Lorentz force generated from the second AF coil 347b are equal, the direction of the resultant force of each Lorentz force is one of the other in the X direction. It is. Since the first AF magnet 346a and the second AF magnet 347a are fixed to the second base 32, a reaction force acts on the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b. This reaction force becomes the driving force of the voice coil motor for AF, and the lens guide 341 holding the first AF coil 346b and the second AF coil 347b moves in the X direction (the direction of the second optical axis), and the auto focus is performed. Is
　上述のようなオートフォーカスは、レンズガイド３４１を、たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｘ１のようにＸ方向に平行に変位させると好ましい。ところが、オートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１の変位をＸ方向から逸脱させるような外力（たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｆの方向のモーメント）が、レンズガイド３４１に作用する場合がある。このような外力が作用すると、レンズガイド３４１に作用する推力が、Ｘ方向に平行な推力（第一推力）のみだと、レンズガイド３４１は、図２７の矢印ＡＸ２のように、Ｘ方向から逸脱した方向に変位してしまう。このような外力は、上述のモーメントだけでなく、たとえば、Ｙ方向を向いた力の場合もある。あるいは、外力は、モーメントおよびＹ方向を向いた力を含む場合もある。 In the autofocus as described above, it is preferable to displace the lens guide 341 in parallel with the X direction, for example, as indicated by an arrow Ax1 in FIG. However, during autofocusing, an external force (for example, a moment in the direction of arrow Af in FIG. 27) that causes the displacement of the lens guide 341 to deviate from the X direction may act on the lens guide 341. When such external force acts, if the thrust acting on the lens guide 341 is only the thrust parallel to the X direction (first thrust), the lens guide 341 is moved from the X direction as indicated by an arrow AX2 in FIG. It is displaced in a deviated direction. Such an external force may be, for example, a force directed in the Y direction, in addition to the moment described above. Alternatively, the external force may include a moment and a force directed in the Y direction.
　これに対して、本実施形態の場合、オートフォーカスの際、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が生じる推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が生じる推力とを異ならせることにより、Ｘ方向に平行な推力（第一推力）と、上記外力に抗する抵抗力（第二推力）とを含むような推力を生成する。具体的には、オートフォーカスの際、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃ（つまり、第一検出部３４６ｅ）により第一ＡＦマグネット３４６ａの位置を検出するとともに、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃ（つまり、第二検出部３４７ｅ）により第二ＡＦマグネット３４７ａの位置を検出する。 On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, by making the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 different from the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 during autofocus, the thrust parallel to the X direction (first thrust) Thrust) and a resistance (second thrust) against the external force. Specifically, at the time of autofocusing, the AF actuator 345 detects the position of the first AF magnet 346a by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first detection unit 346e), and also detects the position of the second AF controller 347c (that is, The position of the second AF magnet 347a is detected by the second detector 347e).
　そして、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、第一ＡＦコントローラ３４６ｃ（つまり、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆ）により第一ＡＦコイル３４６ｂの電流値を制御するとともに、第二ＡＦコントローラ３４７ｃ（つまり、第二駆動制御部３４７ｆ）により第二ＡＦコイル３４７ｂの電流値を制御する。これにより、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が生じる推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が生じる推力とを異ならせる。このような推力の違いに基づいて、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、Ｘ方向に平行な推力（第一推力）と、上述の抵抗力（第二推力）とを含む推力を生成する。具体的には、Ｘ方向に平行な推力は、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が生じる推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が生じる推力との合力である。また、上述の抵抗力（第二推力）は、第一ＡＦアクチュエータ３４６が生じる推力と、第二ＡＦアクチュエータ３４７が生じる推力との差異に基づいて生じるモーメント（図２７の矢印Ａｒ参照）である。 The AF actuator 345 controls the current value of the first AF coil 346b by the first AF controller 346c (that is, the first drive control unit 346f), and also controls the second AF controller 347c (that is, the second drive control unit 347f). ) Controls the current value of the second AF coil 347b. Thus, the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347 are made different. Based on such a difference in thrust, the AF actuator 345 generates a thrust including a thrust parallel to the X direction (first thrust) and the above-described resistance (second thrust). Specifically, the thrust parallel to the X direction is a combined force of the thrust generated by the first AF actuator 346 and the thrust generated by the second AF actuator 347. The resistance force of the above (secondary thrust) is the a thrust first AF actuator 346 occurs, occurs on the basis of the difference between the thrusts second AF actuator 347 occurs moment (see arrow A r in FIG. 27) .
　なお、上記第一電流値および上記第二電流値は、たとえば、事前に行われたキャリブレーションにより、第一駆動制御部３４６ｆおよび第二駆動制御部３４７ｆに記憶された予備データから選択される。この予備データは、たとえば、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５によりレンズガイド３４１をＸ方向に変位させた場合の、変位方向（たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｘ１の方向）、変位量Ｄ３（図２７参照）、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向からの逸脱方向（たとえば、図２７の矢印ＡＸの方向）、およびレンズガイド３４１のＸ方向からの逸脱量Ｄ４（図２７参照）からなるＡＦ用パラメータと、このＡＦ用パラメータに対応付けて記憶された上記逸脱量Ｄ４をゼロにする第一電流値および第二電流値とを含む。上述のキャリブレーションは、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向における全ストロークの範囲で、上記ＡＦ用パラメータに対応する第一電流値および第二電流値を求める。 The first current value and the second current value are selected from preliminary data stored in the first drive control unit 346f and the second drive control unit 347f by, for example, calibration performed in advance. The preliminary data, for example, in the case of displacing the lens guide 341 in the X direction by the AF actuator 345, the displacement direction (e.g., the direction of the arrow Ax 1 in FIG. 27), the displacement amount D 3 (see FIG. 27), the lens departure direction of the X direction guides 341 (e.g., arrow a X direction in FIG. 27) and the AF parameter consisting deviation amount D 4 (see FIG. 27) from the X direction, and the lens guide 341, for the AF and a first current value and second current value to the deviation amount D 4 which is stored in association with the parameter to zero. In the above-described calibration, the first current value and the second current value corresponding to the AF parameters are obtained in the range of the entire stroke of the lens guide 341 in the X direction.
　上述の外力に対してＡＦアクチュエータ３４５が生成する抵抗力は、たとえば、図２７の矢印Ａｒの方向の回転モーメントである。そして、ＡＦアクチュエータ３４５は、生成した推力（第一推力と第二推力との合力）を、レンズガイド３４１に作用させる。この結果、このような推力が作用したレンズガイド３４１は、上記外力が作用している状態において、図２７の矢印Ａｘ１のようにＸ方向に平行に変位できる。 Resistance force AF actuator 345 generates for the above-described external force, for example, a rotational moment in the direction of arrow A r in FIG. Then, the AF actuator 345 causes the generated thrust (the resultant force of the first thrust and the second thrust) to act on the lens guide 341. As a result, the lens guide 341 to which such a thrust has acted can be displaced in parallel with the X direction as indicated by an arrow Ax1 in FIG. 27 in a state where the external force acts.
　なお、図２８に二点鎖線で示されるように、レンズガイド３４１には、停止状態において、Ｙ方向およびＺ方向（具体的には、基準部３２ｎの第一基準面３２ｎ１）に対して、傾斜させるような力が作用する場合がある。このような力は、組み付けの誤差、または、第一支持機構３４２を構成するスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４の個体差などに起因して生じる。このような傾きが存在すると、オートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１がこの傾きを維持したまま変位してしまう。 As shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 28, the lens guide 341 is inclined with respect to the Y direction and the Z direction (specifically, the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n) in the stopped state. May be applied. Such a force is generated due to an assembly error or an individual difference between the springs 342a1 to 342a4 constituting the first support mechanism 342. If such a tilt exists, the lens guide 341 will be displaced while maintaining this tilt during autofocusing.
　そこで本実施形態の場合、図２８に実線で示されるように、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向＋側の端面を基準部３２ｎの第一基準面３２ｎ１に当接させた状態（つまり、レンズガイド３４１の基準状態）を基準として、上述のキャリブレーションを行う。これにより、上述のオートフォーカスの際、レンズガイド３４１は、基準部３２ｎの第一基準面３２ｎ１に対して傾斜していない状態（つまり、図２８の実線で示されるレンズガイド３４１の状態）を維持しつつ、Ｘ方向に変位できる。また、以上のような構成によれば、カメラモジュール１の組立工程において、プリズムモジュール２とレンズモジュール３との間のアクティブアライメントの作業を省略または簡略化できる可能性がある。 Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 28, a state where the end surface of the lens guide 341 on the + side in the X direction is in contact with the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n (that is, the lens guide 341 The above-described calibration is performed based on the reference state). Accordingly, during the above-described autofocus, the lens guide 341 maintains a state in which the lens guide 341 is not inclined with respect to the first reference surface 32n1 of the reference portion 32n (that is, a state of the lens guide 341 indicated by a solid line in FIG. 28). While moving in the X direction. Further, according to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the operation of the active alignment between the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 can be omitted or simplified in the assembly process of the camera module 1.
　＜本実施形態の作用・効果について＞
　以上のように、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュール１によれば、プリズムモジュール２において、固定側部材である第一ベース２２から可動側部材であるホルダ２５に伝わる衝撃が、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂにより緩和される。 <Operations and effects of the present embodiment>
As described above, according to the camera module 1 according to the present embodiment, in the prism module 2, the impact transmitted from the first base 22 that is the fixed member to the holder 25 that is the movable member is a pair of swing support springs. Alleviated by 26A and 26B.
　また、本実施形態の場合、一対の揺動支持バネ２６Ａ、２６Ｂ（具体的には、ストレート部２６ｄ、２６ｅ）が、ホルダ２５の揺動中心である第一軸２９Ｌを構成している。このような構成は、ホルダ２５に揺動中心軸を設ける必要がなく、かつ、第一ベース２２に揺動中心軸を受ける軸受部を設ける必要がない。このため。ホルダ２５および第一ベース２２の構成がシンプルである。 In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, the pair of swing support springs 26A and 26B (specifically, the straight portions 26d and 26e) constitute the first shaft 29L that is the swing center of the holder 25. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide the swing center axis in the holder 25, and it is not necessary to provide the first base 22 with a bearing portion for receiving the swing center axis. For this reason. The configurations of the holder 25 and the first base 22 are simple.
　さらに、本実施形態の場合、ホルダ２５が、第一ベース２２に対して浮くように支持（フローティング支持）されているため、ホルダ２５と第一ベース２２との間に硬い接触点が存在しない。このため、カメラモジュール１に衝撃が加わった場合に、ホルダ２５または第一ベース２２に当該衝撃に基づく圧痕などが生じることがない。 Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the holder 25 is supported so as to float on the first base 22 (floating support), there is no hard contact point between the holder 25 and the first base 22. Therefore, when an impact is applied to the camera module 1, no indentation or the like based on the impact is generated on the holder 25 or the first base 22.
　［実施形態２］
　図２９および図３０を参照して、本発明に係る実施形態２について説明する。本実施形態のカメラモジュールは、第二振れ補正装置の後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂの構造が上述の実施形態１と異なる。以下、本実施形態のカメラモジュールについて、実施形態１と異なる構造を中心に説明する。 [Embodiment 2]
Embodiment 2 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. The camera module of the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in the structure of the rear OIS actuator 351B of the second shake correction device. Hereinafter, the camera module of the present embodiment will be described focusing on a structure different from that of the first embodiment.
　後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂは、駆動機構であって、Ｙ方向＋側に配置された第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２Ｂと、Ｙ方向－側に配置された第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３Ｂとを有する。 The rear OIS actuator 351B is a drive mechanism, and includes a first OIS actuator 352B arranged on the + side in the Y direction and a second OIS actuator 353B arranged on the-side in the Y direction.
　第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５２Ｂは、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａ、および、一対の第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１、３５２ｂ２を有する。第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａは、上述の実施形態１と同様である。 The first OIS actuator 352B has a first OIS magnet 352a and a pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2. The first OIS magnet 352a is the same as in the first embodiment.
　一対の第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１、３５２ｂ２はそれぞれ、振れ補正時に給電される長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。一対の第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１、３５２ｂ２はそれぞれ、長軸がＸ方向に一致した状態で、第二ベース３２のコイル載置部３２ｉに、Ｘ方向に離れた状態で固定されている。 The pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2 are so-called air-core coils each having an elliptical shape to be supplied with power during shake correction. Each of the pair of first OIS coils 352b1 and 352b2 is fixed to the coil mounting portion 32i of the second base 32 in a state where the major axes coincide with each other in the X direction.
　第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５３Ｂは、第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａ、一対の第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１、３５３ｂ２、第一ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｅ、および第二ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｆを有する。第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａは、上述の実施形態１と同様である。 The second OIS actuator 353B has a second OIS magnet 353a, a pair of second OIS coils 353b1, 353b2, a first OIS controller 353e, and a second OIS controller 353f. The second OIS magnet 353a is the same as in the first embodiment.
　一対の第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１、３５３ｂ２はそれぞれ、振れ補正時に給電される長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。一対の第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１、３５３ｂ２はそれぞれ、長軸がＸ方向に一致した状態で、第二ベース３２のコイル載置部３２ｊに、Ｘ方向に離れた状態で固定されている。 The pair of second OIS coils 353b1 and 353b2 are so-called elliptic air-core coils that are supplied with power at the time of shake correction. Each of the pair of second OIS coils 353b1 and 353b2 is fixed to the coil mounting portion 32j of the second base 32 in a state where the major axes coincide with each other in the X direction.
　図示は省略するが、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１は、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１と電気的に接続されている。第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２は、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２と電気的に接続されている。 Although not shown, the second OIS coil 353b1 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b1. The second OIS coil 353b2 is electrically connected to the first OIS coil 352b2.
　図３０に示されるように、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１は、第一コイル給電ラインＬ９ａ、Ｌ１０ａを介して、第一ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｅと接続されている。第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１の電流値は、第一ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｅにより制御される。 As shown in FIG. 30, the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 are connected to the first OIS controller 353e via the first coil power supply lines L9a and L10a. The current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 are controlled by the first OIS controller 353e.
　また、図３０に示されるように、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２は、第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１ａ、Ｌ１２ａを介して、第二ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｆと接続されている。第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２の電流値は、第二ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｆにより制御される。 As shown in FIG. 30, the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 are connected to the second OIS controller 353f via the second coil power supply lines L11a and L12a. The current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 are controlled by the second OIS controller 353f.
　第一ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｅは、ＦＰＣ３４４Ｂに固定されている。このような第一ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｅは、第一検出部３５３ｇと、第一駆動制御部３５３ｈとを有する。 The first OIS controller 353e is fixed to the FPC 344B. Such a first OIS controller 353e has a first detection unit 353g and a first drive control unit 353h.
　第一検出部３５３ｇは、第一検出部３５３ｇが固定された位置における第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａの磁束（位置に関する情報ともいう。）を検出する。第一検出部３５３ｇは、検出値を、第一駆動制御部３５３ｈに送る。 The first detection unit 353g detects the magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the second OIS magnet 353a at the position where the first detection unit 353g is fixed. The first detection unit 353g sends the detection value to the first drive control unit 353h.
　第一駆動制御部３５３ｈは、第一検出部３５３ｇから受け取った検出値に基づいて、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１の電流値を制御する。なお、第一駆動制御部３５３ｈは、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２の電流値に関する制御は行わない。 The first drive control unit 353h controls the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1, based on the detection value received from the first detection unit 353g. Note that the first drive control unit 353h does not control the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2.
　第二ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｆは、ＦＰＣ３４４Ｂに固定されている。このような第二ＯＩＳコントローラ３５３ｆは、第二検出部３５３ｉと、第二駆動制御部３５３ｊとを有する。 The second OIS controller 353f is fixed to the FPC 344B. Such a second OIS controller 353f has a second detection unit 353i and a second drive control unit 353j.
　第二検出部３５３ｉは、第二検出部３５３ｉが固定された位置における第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａの磁束（位置に関する情報ともいう。）を検出する。第二検出部３５３ｉは、検出値を、第二駆動制御部３５３ｊに送る。 The second detector 353i detects the magnetic flux (also referred to as position information) of the second OIS magnet 353a at the position where the second detector 353i is fixed. The second detection unit 353i sends the detection value to the second drive control unit 353j.
　第二駆動制御部３５３ｊは、第二検出部３５３ｉから受け取った検出値に基づいて、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２の電流値を制御する。なお、第二駆動制御部３５３ｊは、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１の電流値に関する制御は行わない。 The second drive control unit 353j controls the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2 based on the detection value received from the second detection unit 353i. Note that the second drive control unit 353j does not control the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1.
　以上のような後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂは、図３０に示されるようなＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃにより制御部５と接続されている。ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃは、ＦＰＣ３４４Ｂに設けられている。 後 The rear OIS actuator 351B as described above is connected to the control unit 5 by an OIS drive control circuit 344c as shown in FIG. The OIS drive control circuit 344c is provided in the FPC 344B.
　ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃは、図３０に示されるように、第一電源ラインＬ１ａ、第二電源ラインＬ２ａ、第一接地ラインＬ３ａ、第二接地ラインＬ４ａ、第一データ信号ラインＬ５ａ、第二データ信号ラインＬ６ａ、第一クロックラインＬ７ａ、第二クロックラインＬ８ａ、第一コイル給電ラインＬ９ａ、Ｌ１０ａおよび第二コイル給電ラインＬ１１ａ、Ｌ１２ａを有する。このようなＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃは、上述の実施形態１におけるＡＦ駆動制御回路３４４ｂとほぼ同様である。このため、ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃに関する詳しい説明は省略する。ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路３４４ｃについては、上述の実施形態１におけるＡＦ駆動制御回路３４４ｂに関する説明を、適宜読み替えることができる。 As shown in FIG. 30, the OIS drive control circuit 344c includes a first power line L1a, a second power line L2a, a first ground line L3a, a second ground line L4a, a first data signal line L5a, and a second data signal. It has a line L6a, a first clock line L7a, a second clock line L8a, first coil power supply lines L9a and L10a, and second coil power supply lines L11a and L12a. Such an OIS drive control circuit 344c is substantially the same as the AF drive control circuit 344b in the first embodiment. Therefore, a detailed description of the OIS drive control circuit 344c is omitted. Regarding the OIS drive control circuit 344c, the description of the AF drive control circuit 344b in the first embodiment can be appropriately replaced.
　上述のような本実施形態の構成は、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１の電流値と、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２および第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２の電流値とを独立して制御することにより、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ１、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ１、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａ、および第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａにより構成されるアクチュエータ（以下、第一アクチュエータという。）が発生する推力と、第一ＯＩＳコイル３５２ｂ２、第二ＯＩＳコイル３５３ｂ２、第一ＯＩＳマグネット３５２ａ、および第二ＯＩＳマグネット３５３ａにより構成されるアクチュエータ（以下、第二アクチュエータという。）とが発生する推力とを異ならせることができる。 The configuration of the present embodiment as described above is achieved by independently controlling the current values of the first OIS coil 352b1 and the second OIS coil 353b1 and the current values of the first OIS coil 352b2 and the second OIS coil 353b2. , A first OIS coil 352b1, a second OIS coil 353b1, a first OIS magnet 352a, and a thrust generated by an actuator (hereinafter, referred to as a first actuator) constituted by a second OIS magnet 353a, and a first OIS coil 352b2. , A second OIS coil 353b2, a first OIS magnet 352a, and an actuator (hereinafter, referred to as a second actuator) constituted by the second OIS magnet 353a can be made to have a different thrust.
　具体的には、第一アクチュエータが発生する推力と、第二アクチュエータが発生する推力とが同じ場合には、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂが発生する推力は、Ｙ方向の第一推力のみからなる。一方、第一アクチュエータが発生する推力と、第二アクチュエータが発生する推力とが異なる場合には、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂが発生する推力は、第一アクチュエータが生じる推力と第二アクチュエータが生じる推力の合力であるＹ方向の第一推力と、この合力に基づいて生じる可動側部材の重心Ｇまわりのモーメントである第二推力とを有する。 Specifically, when the thrust generated by the first actuator and the thrust generated by the second actuator are the same, the thrust generated by the rear OIS actuator 351B includes only the first thrust in the Y direction. On the other hand, when the thrust generated by the first actuator is different from the thrust generated by the second actuator, the thrust generated by the rear OIS actuator 351B is the thrust generated by the first actuator and the thrust generated by the second actuator. It has a first thrust in the Y direction, which is a resultant force, and a second thrust, which is a moment about the center of gravity G of the movable member generated based on this resultant force.
　このような第二推力は、振れ補正の際、レンズガイド３４１をＹ方向から逸脱させようとする外力に抗する抵抗力となる。これにより、後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ３５１Ｂは、振れ補正の際、レンズガイド３４１のＸ方向からの逸脱量を少なくまたはゼロにできる。その他の、構成および作用・効果は上述の実施形態１と同様である。 第二 The second thrust is a resistance against an external force that tends to cause the lens guide 341 to deviate from the Y direction during shake correction. This allows the rear OIS actuator 351B to reduce or eliminate the amount of deviation of the lens guide 341 from the X direction during shake correction. Other configurations, operations, and effects are the same as those in the first embodiment.
　なお、振れ補正の際の本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールの動作は、上述の実施形態１に係るカメラモジュールの動作を適宜読み替えればよい。また、本実施形態の構成は、上述の実施形態１の構成と、技術的に矛盾しない範囲で適宜組み合わせて実施できる。 The operation of the camera module according to the present embodiment at the time of shake correction may be appropriately replaced with the operation of the camera module according to the first embodiment. In addition, the configuration of the present embodiment can be implemented in combination with the configuration of the above-described first embodiment as appropriate within a technically consistent range.
　＜付記＞ <Appendix>
　以上、本発明者によってなされた発明を実施形態に基づいて具体的に説明したが、本発明は上述の実施形態に限定されるものではなく、その要旨を逸脱しない範囲で変更可能である。 Although the invention made by the inventor has been specifically described above based on the embodiment, the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed without departing from the gist of the invention.
　上述の各実施形態は、カメラモジュールが、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を弾性的に支持する第一支持機構と、固定側部材に対して可動側部材をＸＹ平面内での変位可能かつＺ方向への変位不能に支持する第二支持機構とを備えている。 In the above embodiments, the camera module elastically supports the movable member with respect to the fixed member, and the movable member can be displaced in the XY plane with respect to the fixed member. And a second support mechanism that supports the Z-direction so as not to be displaced.
　ただし、本発明を実施する場合に、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を変位可能に支持する支持機構の構成は、上述の第一支持機構および第二支持機構に限定されない。 However, when implementing the present invention, the configuration of the support mechanism that supports the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member is not limited to the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism described above.
　たとえば、本発明を実施する場合に、上述の第一支持機構および第二支持機構のうちの少なくとも一方の支持機構を省略してもよい。たとえば、図３１に示されるレンズモジュール３Ｂは、上述の実施形態１および実施形態２のレンズモジュール３から、第一支持機構３４２（図１３Ｃ、図１４、および図１８参照）を省略した構成を有する。 For example, when implementing the present invention, at least one of the first and second support mechanisms described above may be omitted. For example, the lens module 3B illustrated in FIG. 31 has a configuration in which the first support mechanism 342 (see FIGS. 13C, 14, and 18) is omitted from the lens module 3 of the above-described first and second embodiments. .
　すなわち、図３１に示されるレンズモジュール３Ｂは、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を変位可能に支持する支持機構として、上述の実施形態１および実施形態２における第二支持機構３４３（図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）のみを有している。第二支持機構３４３の構造は、前述の実施形態１と同様である。また、図３１に示されるレンズモジュール３Ｂは、第一支持機構３４２を有していないため、第一支持機構３４２に対応する構成（たとえば、第二ベース３２のスプリング配置部３２ｍ１～３２ｍ４など、図１３Ｃおよび図１４参照）も有していない。 That is, the lens module 3B shown in FIG. 31 has a second support mechanism 343 (FIGS. 13C and 13C) in the first and second embodiments described above as a support mechanism for supporting the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member. 14 (see FIG. 14). The structure of the second support mechanism 343 is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, since the lens module 3B shown in FIG. 31 does not have the first support mechanism 342, the configuration corresponding to the first support mechanism 342 (for example, the spring arrangement portions 32m1 to 32m4 of the second base 32, etc. 13C and FIG. 14).
　なお、図示は省略するが、レンズモジュールは、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を変位可能に支持する支持機構として、上述の実施形態１および実施形態２における第一支持機構３４２のみを有していてもよい。また、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を弾性的に支持する第一支持機構は、スプリング配置部３２ｍ１～３２ｍ４の代わりに、複数のサスペンションワイヤ（不図示）により構成されてもよい。 Although not shown, the lens module has only the first support mechanism 342 in the first and second embodiments as a support mechanism for supporting the movable member displaceably with respect to the fixed member. May be. Further, the first support mechanism that elastically supports the movable member with respect to the fixed member may be configured by a plurality of suspension wires (not shown) instead of the spring disposition portions 32m1 to 32m4.
　また、たとえば、上述の各実施形態では、カメラモジュール１を備えるカメラ搭載装置の一例として、カメラ付き携帯端末であるスマートフォンを挙げて説明したが、本発明は、カメラモジュールとカメラモジュールで得られた画像情報を処理する画像処理部を有するカメラ搭載装置に適用できる。カメラ搭載装置は、情報機器及び輸送機器を含む。情報機器は、たとえば、カメラ付き携帯電話機、ノート型パソコン、タブレット端末、携帯型ゲーム機、ｗｅｂカメラ、カメラ付き車載装置（たとえば、バックモニター装置、ドライブレコーダー装置）を含む。また、輸送機器は、たとえば自動車を含む。 Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a smartphone that is a mobile terminal with a camera has been described as an example of a camera-equipped device including the camera module 1, but the present invention has been obtained with a camera module and a camera module. The present invention can be applied to a camera mounted device having an image processing unit for processing image information. The camera-mounted device includes an information device and a transport device. The information devices include, for example, a camera-equipped mobile phone, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, a web camera, and a camera-equipped in-vehicle device (eg, a back monitor device, a drive recorder device). The transportation device includes, for example, an automobile.
　図３３Ａおよび図３３Ｂは、車載用カメラモジュールＶＣ（Vehicle Camera）を搭載するカメラ搭載装置としての自動車Ｖを示す図である。図３３Ａは自動車Ｖの正面図であり、図３３Ｂは自動車Ｖの後方斜視図である。自動車Ｖは、車載用カメラモジュールＶＣとして、実施の形態で説明したカメラモジュール１を搭載する。図３３Ａおよび図３３Ｂに示すように、車載用カメラモジュールＶＣは、たとえば前方に向けてフロントガラスに取り付けられたり、後方に向けてリアゲートに取り付けられたりする。この車載用カメラモジュールＶＣは、バックモニター用、ドライブレコーダー用、衝突回避制御用、自動運転制御用などとして使用される。 FIGS. 33A and 33B are diagrams showing an automobile V as a camera-mounted device equipped with a vehicle-mounted camera module VC (Vehicle-Camera). FIG. 33A is a front view of the vehicle V, and FIG. 33B is a rear perspective view of the vehicle V. The vehicle V mounts the camera module 1 described in the embodiment as the vehicle-mounted camera module VC. As shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, the vehicle-mounted camera module VC is attached to, for example, a windshield toward the front or to a rear gate toward the rear. The vehicle-mounted camera module VC is used for a back monitor, a drive recorder, a collision avoidance control, an automatic driving control, and the like.
　また、本発明におけるＡＦ用ボイスコルモーター及びＯＩＳ用ボイスコイルモーターの構成は、上述の各実施形態で示したものに限定されない。 The configurations of the voice col motor for AF and the voice coil motor for OIS in the present invention are not limited to those described in the above embodiments.
　また、固定側部材に対して可動側部材を支持する支持機構として、上述の各実施形態で示した第一支持機構３４２のスプリング３４２ａ１～３４２ａ４に代えて、たとえば、エラストマなどからなる弾性支持部材を適用することもできる。 As a support mechanism for supporting the movable member with respect to the fixed member, an elastic support member made of an elastomer or the like is used instead of the springs 342a1 to 342a4 of the first support mechanism 342 shown in each of the above embodiments. It can also be applied.
　本発明は、ＯＩＳ機能を有さず、ＡＦ機能のみを有するレンズ駆動装置にも適用できる。また、本発明は、ＡＦ機能を有さず、ＯＩＳ機能のみを有するレンズ駆動装置にも適用できる。 The present invention can be applied to a lens driving device having only an AF function without an OIS function. Further, the present invention can be applied to a lens driving device having only an OIS function without having an AF function.
　今回開示された上述の各実施形態はすべての点で例示であって制限的なものではないと考えられるべきである。本発明の範囲は上記した説明ではなくて特許請求の範囲によって示され、特許請求の範囲と均等の意味および範囲内でのすべての変更が含まれることが意図される。 The above embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.
　２０１８年７月４日出願の特願２０１８－１２７７８４の日本出願に含まれる明細書、図面および要約書の開示内容は、すべて本願に援用される。 The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-127784, filed on July 4, 2018, including the specification, drawings, and abstract, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
　本発明に係るカメラ用アクチュエータおよびカメラモジュールは、たとえば、スマートフォン、携帯電話機、デジタルカメラ、ノート型パソコン、タブレット端末、携帯型ゲーム機、車載カメラなどの薄型のカメラ搭載装置に搭載できる。 The camera actuator and camera module according to the present invention can be mounted on a thin camera-mounted device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, and a vehicle-mounted camera.
　１　カメラモジュール
　２　プリズムモジュール
　２１　第一カバー
　２２　第一ベース
　２２ａ　底壁部
　２２ｂ　ベース側開口部
　２２ｃ　第一位置決め凸部
　２２ｄ　第二位置決め凸部
　２２０、２２１　第一側壁部
　２２２　接続壁部
　２２３　第一収容空間
　２３　プリズム
　２３１　光路屈曲面
　２４　第一振れ補正装置
　２５　ホルダ
　２５ａ　載置面
　２５ｂ、２５ｃ　対向壁部
　２５ｄ、２５ｅ　張出し部
　２５ｆ、２５ｇ　バネ座面
　２５ｈ、２５ｉ　ホルダ側位置決め凸部
　２５ｊ　マグネット保持部
　２５ｋ　接続壁部
　２６Ａ、２６Ｂ　揺動支持バネ
　２６２　第一固定部
　２６０、２６１　第二固定部
　２６３、２６４　接続部
　２６ａ、２６ｂ　第一貫通孔
　２６ｃ　第二貫通孔
　２６ｄ、２６ｅ　ストレート部
　２６５　捩じれ許容部
　２７　前側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ（第一アクチュエータ）
　２７ａ　第一マグネット
　２７ｃ　第一コイル
　２７ｅ　第一ホール素子
　２８　ＦＰＣ
　２９Ｌ　第一軸
　３、３Ｂ　レンズモジュール
　３１　第二カバー
　３１ａ　天板部
　３１ｂ　前板部
　３１ｃ　後板部
　３１ｄ　第一側板部
　３１ｅ　第二側板部
　３１ｆ　切欠部
　３１ｇ　前側開口部
　３１ｈ　角部
　３１ｉ　後側開口部
　３２　第二ベース
　３２ａ　下側ベース要素
　３２ｂ　上側ベース要素
　３２ｃ　第二収容空間
　３２ｄ　底面部
　３２ｅ、３２ｆ　底面貫通孔
　３２ｇ、３２ｈ　第二側壁部
　３２ａ１　第二下壁要素
　３２ａ２　第二下壁要素
　３２ｂ１　第二上壁要素
　３２ｂ２　第二上壁要素
　３２ｉ、３２ｊ　コイル載置部
　３２ｋ　補強プレート
　３２ｍ１、３２ｍ２、３２ｍ３、３２ｍ４　スプリング配置部
　３２ｎ　基準部
　３２ｎ１　第一基準面
　３３　レンズ部
　３４　ＡＦ装置
　３４１　レンズガイド
　３４１ａ　レンズ保持部
　３４ａ１、３４ａ２　第一張出部
　３４ａ３、３４ａ４　第二張出部
　３４ａ５、３４ａ６　第一マグネット保持部
　３４ａ７、３４ａ８　第二マグネット保持部
　３４ｂ１、３４ｂ２　空間
　３４ｂ３、３４ｂ４　第三マグネット保持部
　３４ｂ５、３４ｂ６　第四マグネット保持部
　３４２　第一支持機構
　３４２ａ１、３４２ａ２、３４２ａ３、３４２ａ４　スプリング
　３４２ｂ　第一固定部
　３４２ｃ　第二固定部
　３４２ｄ　接続部
　３４２ｅ　第一曲げ部
　３４２ｆ　第二曲げ部
　３４３　第二支持機構
　３４３ａ　玉保持部
　３４３ｂ１、３４３ｂ２　軌道部材
　３４３ｃ　軌道面
　３４３ｄ　接続部材
　３４３ｅ　玉
　３４４、３４４Ｂ　ＦＰＣ
　３４４ａ　ＦＰＣ基部
　３４ｄ１　第一ターミナル部
　３４ｄ２　第二ターミナル部
　３４ｄ３　第三ターミナル部
　３４ｄ４　第一コイル固定部
　３４ｄ５　第二コイル固定部
　３４ｄ６　第一コントローラ固定部
　３４ｄ７　第二コントローラ固定部
　３４ｄ８　ホール素子固定部
　３４４ｂ　ＡＦ駆動制御回路
　Ｌ１、Ｌ１ａ　第一電源ライン
　Ｌ２、Ｌ２ａ　第二電源ライン
　Ｌ３、Ｌ３ａ　第一接地ライン
　Ｌ４、Ｌ４ａ　第二接地ライン
　Ｌ５、Ｌ５ａ　第一データ信号ライン
　Ｌ６、Ｌ６ａ　第二データ信号ライン
　Ｌ７、Ｌ７ａ　第一クロックライン
　Ｌ８、Ｌ８ａ　第二クロックライン
　Ｌ９、Ｌ１０、Ｌ９ａ、Ｌ１０ａ　第一コイル給電ライン
　Ｌ１１、Ｌ１２、Ｌ１１ａ、Ｌ１２ａ　第二コイル給電ライン
　Ｔ１　電源端子
　Ｔ２　接地端子
　Ｔ３　データ信号端子
　Ｔ４　第一クロック端子
　Ｔ５　第二クロック端子
　３４４ｃ　ＯＩＳ駆動制御回路
　３４５　ＡＦアクチュエータ（第三アクチュエータ）
　３４６　第一ＡＦアクチュエータ
　３４６ａ　第一ＡＦマグネット
　３４６ｂ　第一ＡＦコイル
　３４６ｃ　第一ＡＦコントローラ
　３４６ｄ　第一Ｘ位置検出マグネット
　３４６ｅ　第一検出部
　３４６ｆ　第一駆動制御部
　３４７　第二ＡＦアクチュエータ
　３４７ａ　第二ＡＦマグネット
　３４７ｂ　第二ＡＦコイル
　３４７ｃ　第二ＡＦコントローラ
　３４７ｄ　第二Ｘ位置検出マグネット
　３４７ｅ　第二検出部
　３４７ｆ　第二駆動制御部
　３５　第二振れ補正装置
　３５１、３５１Ｂ　後側ＯＩＳアクチュエータ（第二アクチュエータ）
　３５２、３５２Ｂ　第一ＯＩＳアクチュエータ
　３５２ａ　第一ＯＩＳマグネット
　３５２ｂ、３５２ｂ１、３５２ｂ２　第一ＯＩＳコイル
　３５２ｃ　Ｙ位置検出マグネット
　３５３、３５３Ｂ　第二ＯＩＳアクチュエータ
　３５３ａ　第二ＯＩＳマグネット
　３５３ｂ、３５３ｂ１、３５３ｂ２　第二ＯＩＳコイル
　３５３ｃ　Ｙ位置検出マグネット
　３５３ｄ　ＯＩＳホール素子
　３５３ｅ　第一ＯＩＳコントローラ
　３５３ｆ　第二ＯＩＳコントローラ
　３５３ｇ　第一検出部
　３５３ｈ　第一駆動制御部
　３５３ｉ　第二検出部
　３５３ｊ　第二駆動制御部
　４　撮像素子モジュール
　５　制御部
　６　センサ基板
　６ａ　基板側回路
　７ａ、７ｂ　シールド板
　Ｍ　スマートフォン
　Ｖ　自動車
　ＶＣ　車載用カメラモジュール DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Camera module 2 Prism module 21 First cover 22 First base 22a Bottom wall 22b Base side opening 22c First positioning convex 22d Second positioning convex 220, 221 First side wall 222 Connection wall 223 First accommodation Space 23 Prism 231 Optical path bending surface 24 First shake correction device 25 Holder 25a Placement surface 25b, 25c Opposing wall portion 25d, 25e Overhang portion 25f, 25g Spring seat surface 25h, 25i Holder side positioning protrusion 25j Magnet holding portion 25k Connection Wall 26A, 26B Swing support spring 262 First fixed part 260, 261 Second fixed part 263, 264 Connection part 26a, 26b First through hole 26c Second through hole 26d, 26e Straight part 265 Torsion allowable part 27 Front OIS Actuator (first actuator)
27a first magnet 27c first coil 27e first Hall element 28 FPC
29L first shaft 3, 3B lens module 31 second cover 31a top plate 31b front plate 31c rear plate 31d first side plate 31e second side plate 31f notch 31g front opening 31h corner 31i rear opening 32 second base 32a lower base element 32b upper base element 32c second accommodation space 32d bottom surface part 32e, 32f bottom through hole 32g, 32h second side wall part 32a1 second lower wall element 32a2 second lower wall element 32b1 second upper Wall element 32b2 Second upper wall element 32i, 32j Coil mounting part 32k Reinforcement plate 32m1, 32m2, 32m3, 32m4 Spring arrangement part 32n Reference part 32n1 First reference plane 33 Lens part 34 AF device 341 Lens guide 341a Lens holding part 34a1 , 34a2 First overhanging parts 34a3, 34a4 Two projecting parts 34a5, 34a6 First magnet holding parts 34a7, 34a8 Second magnet holding parts 34b1, 34b2 Spaces 34b3, 34b4 Third magnet holding parts 34b5, 34b6 Fourth magnet holding parts 342 First support mechanism 342a1, 342a2, 342a3 , 342a4 Spring 342b First fixing portion 342c Second fixing portion 342d Connection portion 342e First bending portion 342f Second bending portion 343 Second support mechanism 343a Ball holding portion 343b1, 343b2 Track member 343c Track surface 343d Connection member 343e Ball 344 344B FPC
344a FPC base portion 34d1 First terminal portion 34d2 Second terminal portion 34d3 Third terminal portion 34d4 First coil fixing portion 34d5 Second coil fixing portion 34d6 First controller fixing portion 34d7 Second controller fixing portion 34d8 Hall element fixing portion 344b AF drive Control circuit L1, L1a First power supply line L2, L2a Second power supply line L3, L3a First ground line L4, L4a Second ground line L5, L5a First data signal line L6, L6a Second data signal line L7, L7a One clock line L8, L8a Second clock line L9, L10, L9a, L10a First coil power supply line L11, L12, L11a, L12a Second coil power supply line T1 Power supply terminal T2 Ground terminal T3 Data signal terminal T4 First clock Terminal T5 second clock terminal 344 c OIS drive control circuit 345 AF actuator (third actuator)
346 First AF actuator 346a First AF magnet 346b First AF coil 346c First AF controller 346d First X position detection magnet 346e First detection unit 346f First drive control unit 347 Second AF actuator 347a Second AF magnet 347b First Second AF coil 347c Second AF controller 347d Second X position detection magnet 347e Second detector 347f Second drive controller 35 Second shake correction device 351, 351B Rear OIS actuator (second actuator)
352, 352B First OIS actuator 352a First OIS magnet 352b, 352b1, 352b2 First OIS coil 352c Y position detection magnet 353, 353B Second OIS actuator 353a Second OIS magnet 353b, 353b1, 353b2 Second OIS coil 353c Y position Detection magnet 353d OIS Hall element 353e First OIS controller 353f Second OIS controller 353g First detection unit 353h First drive control unit 353i Second detection unit 353j Second drive control unit 4 Image sensor module 5 Control unit 6 Sensor substrate 6a Substrate Side circuit 7a, 7b Shield plate M Smartphone V Automotive VC In-vehicle camera module

Claims (12)

  1. 　固定側部材と、
    　第一方向に沿う入射光を第二方向に屈曲させる光路屈曲部材と、
    　前記光路屈曲部材を保持する可動側部材と、
    　前記固定側部材に対して前記可動側部材を、前記第一方向および前記第二方向に直交する揺動中心軸を中心として揺動させる第一アクチュエータと、
    　前記固定側部材に対して前記可動側部材を弾性的に支持する弾性支持部材と、
    　を備え、
    　前記弾性支持部材は、
    　　前記揺動中心軸の位置に対応する位置で前記可動側部材に固定される第一固定部と、
    　　前記揺動中心軸の位置を挟んで互いに離間した位置で前記固定側部材に固定される一対の第二固定部と、
    　　前記一対の第二固定部からそれぞれ前記揺動中心軸の位置へ向けて延びて前記第一固定部に接続する接続部と、
    　を有する、
    　カメラ用アクチュエータ。     A fixed side member,
    An optical path bending member that bends incident light along the first direction in the second direction,
    A movable side member that holds the optical path bending member,
    A first actuator that swings the movable side member with respect to the fixed side member around a swing center axis orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction,
    An elastic support member for elastically supporting the movable member with respect to the fixed member,
    With
    The elastic support member,
    A first fixing portion fixed to the movable side member at a position corresponding to the position of the swing center axis,
    A pair of second fixing portions fixed to the fixed side member at positions separated from each other with the position of the swing center axis interposed therebetween,
    A connecting portion extending from the pair of second fixing portions toward the position of the swing center axis and connecting to the first fixing portion,
    Having,
    Actuator for camera.
  2. 　前記接続部は、前記可動側部材を揺動させるように捩じれる捩じれ許容部を有する、請求項１に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 2. The camera actuator according to claim 1, wherein the connection portion has a twist allowable portion that is twisted to swing the movable member. 3.
  3. 　前記捩じれ許容部は、前記揺動中心軸と平行な方向に延在する、請求項２に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The camera actuator according to claim 2, wherein the torsion allowance portion extends in a direction parallel to the swing center axis.
  4. 　前記弾性支持部材は、前記固定側部材から浮くように前記可動側部材を支持している、請求項１～３の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 4. The camera actuator according to claim 1, wherein the elastic supporting member supports the movable member so as to float from the fixed member.
  5. 　前記弾性支持部材は、前記揺動中心軸に平行な第三方向において、前記光路屈曲部材の両側に配置されている、請求項１～４の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the elastic support member is disposed on both sides of the optical path bending member in a third direction parallel to the swing center axis.
  6. 　前記光路屈曲部材は光路屈曲面を有し、
    　前記第一アクチュエータは、前記光路屈曲部材に対して前記光路屈曲面の裏側に配置される、請求項１～５の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。     The optical path bending member has an optical path bending surface,
    The camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first actuator is disposed on a back side of the optical path bending surface with respect to the optical path bending member.
  7. 　前記光路屈曲部材および前記第一アクチュエータは、前記第一方向において互いに離間して配置される、請求項１～６の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the optical path bending member and the first actuator are arranged apart from each other in the first direction.
  8. 　前記第一方向は、前記カメラ用アクチュエータの上部から底部に向かって延在し、
    　前記第一アクチュエータは、前記カメラ用アクチュエータの底部に配置される、
    　請求項１～７の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。     The first direction extends from the top to the bottom of the camera actuator,
    The first actuator is disposed at the bottom of the camera actuator,
    The camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  9. 　前記光路屈曲部材の後段に配置されたレンズ部と、
    　前記レンズ部を、前記第一方向および前記第二方向に直交する第三方向に変位させる第二アクチュエータと、
    　前記レンズ部を、前記第二方向に変位させる第三アクチュエータと、をさらに備える、請求項１～８の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。     A lens portion disposed at a stage subsequent to the optical path bending member,
    A second actuator that displaces the lens unit in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction,
    The camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising: a third actuator that displaces the lens unit in the second direction.
  10. 　前記第一アクチュエータおよび前記第二アクチュエータは、振れ補正用アクチュエータを構成し、
    　前記第三アクチュエータは、オートフォーカス用アクチュエータを構成する、
    　請求項９に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。     The first actuator and the second actuator constitute a shake correction actuator,
    The third actuator constitutes an autofocus actuator,
    The camera actuator according to claim 9.
  11. 　請求項１～１０の何れか一項に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータと、
    　前記カメラ用アクチュエータの後段に配置された撮像素子と、
    　を備えるカメラモジュール。     A camera actuator according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
    An imaging element arranged at a stage subsequent to the camera actuator,
    A camera module comprising:
  12. 　請求項１１に記載のカメラモジュールと、
    　前記カメラモジュールを制御する制御部と、
    　を有するカメラ搭載装置。     A camera module according to claim 11,
    A control unit for controlling the camera module;
    Camera mounted device having
PCT/JP2019/026209 2018-07-04 2019-07-02 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device WO2020009085A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980043631.2A CN112334826B (en) 2018-07-04 2019-07-02 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018-127784 2018-07-04
JP2018127784A JP7068581B2 (en) 2018-07-04 2018-07-04 Camera actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020009085A1 true WO2020009085A1 (en) 2020-01-09

Family

ID=69060390

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/026209 WO2020009085A1 (en) 2018-07-04 2019-07-02 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7068581B2 (en)
CN (1) CN112334826B (en)
WO (1) WO2020009085A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20210100429A (en) * 2020-02-06 2021-08-17 엘지이노텍 주식회사 Prism actuator
JP7352105B2 (en) * 2020-09-25 2023-09-28 ミツミ電機株式会社 Optical actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices
CN114755792A (en) * 2020-12-29 2022-07-15 新思考电机有限公司 Lens driving device, camera device, and electronic apparatus
JP7467761B2 (en) 2021-03-09 2024-04-15 アルプスアルパイン株式会社 Reflector drive unit
JP2022153710A (en) * 2021-03-30 2022-10-13 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit with swing correction function

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011070222A (en) * 2010-12-20 2011-04-07 Fujifilm Corp Variable magnification optical system with vibration-proof function and imaging device incorporating the variable magnification optical system
JP2014098931A (en) * 2006-12-04 2014-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Apparatus and method for correcting shaking of image photographic device
JP2016133805A (en) * 2015-01-19 2016-07-25 エーエーシーアコースティックテクノロジーズ（シンセン）カンパニーリミテッドＡＡＣ Ａｃｏｕｓｔｉｃ Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｉｅｓ（Ｓｈｅｎｚｈｅｎ）Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ Lens driving device
JP2017198979A (en) * 2016-04-08 2017-11-02 台湾東電化股▲ふん▼有限公司 Camera module

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010035818A1 (en) * 2008-09-29 2010-04-01 日本電産コパル株式会社 Image blur correction device, imaging lens unit, and camera unit
CN101790033B (en) * 2009-01-28 2014-04-16 奥林巴斯映像株式会社 Image pickup apparatus and camera shake correcting apparatus applied to image pickup apparatus
JP5534760B2 (en) * 2009-09-24 2014-07-02 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit with shake correction function
JP2013109248A (en) * 2011-11-24 2013-06-06 Tamron Co Ltd Anti-vibration actuator

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014098931A (en) * 2006-12-04 2014-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Apparatus and method for correcting shaking of image photographic device
JP2011070222A (en) * 2010-12-20 2011-04-07 Fujifilm Corp Variable magnification optical system with vibration-proof function and imaging device incorporating the variable magnification optical system
JP2016133805A (en) * 2015-01-19 2016-07-25 エーエーシーアコースティックテクノロジーズ（シンセン）カンパニーリミテッドＡＡＣ Ａｃｏｕｓｔｉｃ Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｉｅｓ（Ｓｈｅｎｚｈｅｎ）Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ Lens driving device
JP2017198979A (en) * 2016-04-08 2017-11-02 台湾東電化股▲ふん▼有限公司 Camera module

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7068581B2 (en) 2022-05-17
CN112334826B (en) 2022-08-23
CN112334826A (en) 2021-02-05
JP2020008650A (en) 2020-01-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020009085A1 (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device
JP7295475B2 (en) Optical actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices
US11567338B2 (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device
CN112946856B (en) Lens driving device, camera module, and camera mounting device
JP7057492B2 (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mount device
CN112782829B (en) Automatic focusing device and camera module
JP7041360B2 (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mount device
JP6507628B2 (en) Actuator, camera module and camera mounted device
CN110231747B (en) Optical unit with shake correction function
TWI777032B (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted device
TW201805711A (en) Actuator, camera module and camera-equipped device
US20200371404A1 (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mount device
WO2020090639A1 (en) Actuator for camera, camera module, and device with camera
US20240045309A1 (en) Optical element drive device, camera module, and camera mounting device
US20220394163A1 (en) Optical actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted apparatus
JP7352105B2 (en) Optical actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices
JP7381896B2 (en) Lens drive device, camera module and camera mounting device
KR20230113294A (en) Optical actuators, camera modules, and camera mounting devices
JP2022095846A (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mounted device
JP2021113848A (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera boarding device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19830416

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19830416

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1